- Computers & electronics
- Computer components
- System components
- Motherboards
- HP
- Compaq dc7100 DT
- User manual
advertisement
Technical Reference Guide
HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series
Business Desktop Computers
Document Part Number: 361834-002
January 2005
This document provides information on the design, architecture, function, and capabilities of the HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business
Desktop Computers. This information may be used by engineers, technicians, administrators, or anyone needing detailed information on the products covered.
© Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Intel, Pentium, Intel Inside, and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
Å WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
Ä CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information.
Technical Reference Guide
HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business Desktop Computers
Second Edition (January 2005)
First Edition (April 2004)
Document Part Number: 361834-002
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.1.1 Online Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.1.2 Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Additional Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 Model Numbering Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.4 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.5 Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.5.1 Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.5.2 Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.5.3 Register Notation and Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.5.4 Bit Notation and Byte Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1.6 Common Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
2 System Overview
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
2.2 Features And Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
2.2.1 Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
2.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
2.3 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
2.3.1 Cabinet Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
2.3.2 Chassis Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
2.3.3 Board Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
2.4 System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
2.4.1 Intel Pentium 4 Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
2.4.2 Chipset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
2.4.3 Support Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
2.4.4 System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
2.4.5 Mass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
2.4.6 Serial and Parallel Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
2.4.8 Network Interface Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
2.4.9 Graphics Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
2.4.10Audio Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
2.5 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
3 Processor/Memory Subsystem
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3.2 Pentium 4 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3.2.1 Processor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 iii
Contents
3.2.2 Processor Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
3.3 Memory Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
3.4 Subsystem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
4 System Support
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
4.2 PCI Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
4.2.1 PCI Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
4.2.2 PCI Bus Master Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
4.2.3 Option ROM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
4.2.4 PCI Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
4.2.5 PCI Power Management Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
4.2.6 PCI Sub-Busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
4.2.7 PCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
4.3 AGP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
4.3.1 Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
4.3.2 AGP Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
4.4 System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
4.4.1 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
4.4.2 Direct Memory Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
4.5 System Clock Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
4.6 Real-Time Clock and Configuration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
4.6.1 Clearing CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
4.6.2 CMOS Archive and Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
4.6.3 Standard CMOS Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
4.7 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
4.7.1 Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
4.7.2 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
4.7.3 System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
4.7.4 Thermal Sensing and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
4.8 Register Map and Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
4.8.1 System I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
4.8.2 LPC47B397 I/O Controller Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
5.2 Enhanced IDE/SATA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
5.2.1 EIDE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
5.3 Diskette Drive Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
5.3.1 Diskette Drive Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
5.3.2 Diskette Drive Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
5.4 Serial Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
5.4.1 Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
5.4.2 Serial Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
5.5 Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
5.5.1 Standard Parallel Port Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
5.5.2 Enhanced Parallel Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
5.5.3 Extended Capabilities Port Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15 iv 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Contents
5.5.4 Parallel Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
5.5.5 Parallel Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
5.6 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
5.6.1 Keyboard Interface Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
5.6.2 Pointing Device Interface Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
5.6.3 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
5.6.4 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
5.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
5.7.1 USB Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
5.7.2 USB Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
5.7.3 USB Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
5.7.4 USB Cable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
5.8 Audio Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
5.8.1 Functional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
5.8.2 AC97 Audio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
5.8.3 AC97 Link Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
5.8.4 Audio Codec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
5.8.5 Audio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
5.8.6 Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
5.9 Network Interface Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
5.9.1 Wake-On-LAN Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
5.9.2 Alert Standard Format Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
5.9.3 Power Management Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
5.9.4 NIC Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38
5.9.5 NIC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38
5.9.6 NIC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
6 Integrated Graphics Subsystem
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
6.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
6.2.1 Video Memory Allocation Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
6.3 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
6.4 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
6.5 Upgrading 845G-Based Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
6.6 VGA Monitor Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
7 Power and Signal Distribution
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
7.2 Power Supply Assembly/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
7.2.1 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
7.2.2 Power Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
7.2.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
7.3 Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
7.3.1 3.3/5/12 VDC Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
7.3.2 Low Voltage Production/Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
7.4 Signal Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 v
Contents
8 BIOS ROM
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
8.2 ROM Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
8.2.1 Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
8.2.2 Changeable Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
8.3 Boot Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
8.3.1 Boot Device Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
8.3.2 Network Boot (F12) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
8.3.3 Memory Detection and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
8.3.4 Boot Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
8.4 Setup Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
8.5 Client Management Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
8.5.1 System ID and ROM Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
8.5.2 EDID Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
8.5.3 Temperature Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
8.5.4 Drive Fault Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
8.6 PnP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
8.6.1 SMBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
8.7 Power Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
8.7.1 Independent PM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
8.8 USB Legacy Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
A Error Messages and Codes
B ASCII Character Set
C Keyboard
Index
vi 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
1
Introduction
1.1 About this Guide
This guide provides technical information about HP Compaq dx71xx and dc61xx series personal computers that feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 915G chipset. This document describes in detail the system's design and operation for programmers, engineers, technicians, and system administrators, as well as end-users wanting detailed information.
The chapters of this guide primarily describe the hardware and firmware elements and primarily deal with the system board and the power supply assembly. The appendices contain general data such as error codes and information about standard peripheral devices such as keyboards, graphics cards, and communications adapters.
This guide can be used either as an online document or in hardcopy form.
1.1.1 Online Viewing
Online viewing allows for quick navigating and convenient searching through the document. A color monitor will also allow the user to view the color shading used to highlight differential data. A softcopy of the latest edition of this guide is available for downloading in .pdf file format at the URL listed below: www.hp.com
Viewing the file requires a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader available at no charge from Adobe
Systems, Inc. at the following URL: www.adobe.com
When viewing with Adobe Acrobat Reader, click on the ( ) icon or “Bookmarks” tab to display the navigation pane for quick access to particular places in the guide.
1.1.2 Hardcopy
A hardcopy of this guide may be obtained by printing from the .pdf file. The document is designed for printing in an 8 ½ x 11-inch format. Note that printing in black and white will lose color shading properties.
1.2 Additional Information Sources
For more information on components mentioned in this guide refer to the indicated manufacturers' documentation, which may be available at the following online sources:
■
■
■
■
HP Corporation: www.hp.com
Intel Corporation:
Standard Microsystems Corporation:
USB user group: www.intel.com
www.usb.org www.smsc.com
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 1-1
Introduction
The model numbering convention or HP systems is as follows:
1-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Introduction
The unit's serial number is located on a sticker placed on the exterior cabinet. The serial number is also written into firmware and may be read with HP Diagnostics or Insight Manager utilities.
The notational guidelines used in this guide are described in the following subsections.
1.5.1 Values
Hexadecimal values are indicated by a numerical or alpha-numerical value followed by the letter
“h.” Binary values are indicated by a value of ones and zeros followed by the letter “b.”
Numerical values that have no succeeding letter can be assumed to be decimal unless otherwise stated.
1.5.2 Ranges
Ranges or limits for a parameter are shown using the following methods:
Example A:
Example B:
Bits <7..4> = bits 7, 6, 5, and 4.
IRQ3-7, 9 = IRQ signals 3 through 7, and IRQ signal 9
1.5.3 Register Notation and Usage
This guide uses standard Intel naming conventions in discussing the microprocessor's (CPU) internal registers. Registers that are accessed through programmable I/O using an indexing scheme are indicated using the following format:
03C5.17h
Index port
Data port
In the example above, register 03C5.17h is accessed by writing the index port value 17h to the index address (03C4h), followed by a write to or a read from port 03C5h.
1.5.4 Bit Notation and Byte Values
Bit designations are labeled between brackets (i.e., “bit <0 >”). Binary values are shown with the most significant bit (MSb) on the far left, least significant bit (LSb) at the far right. Byte values in hexadecimal are also shown with the MSB on the left, LSB on the right.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 1-3
Introduction
1.6 Common Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1-1 lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide.
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym or
Abbreviation
AVI
AVGA
AWG
BAT
BCD
BIOS bis
BNC bps or b/s
BSP
BTO
CAS
CD
CD-ROM
CDS
CGA
APIC
APM
AOL
ASIC
ASF
AT
ATA
ATAPI
A
AC
ACPI
A/D
ADC
ADD or ADD2
AGP
API
Description ampere alternating current
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface analog-to-digital
Analog-to-digital converter
Advanced digital display (card)
Accelerated graphics port application programming interface
Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller advanced power management
Alert-On-LAN™ application-specific integrated circuit
Alert Standard Format
1. attention (modem commands) 2. 286-based PC architecture
AT attachment (IDE protocol)
ATA w/packet interface extensions audio-video interleaved
Advanced VGA
American Wire Gauge (specification)
Basic assurance test binary-coded decimal basic input/output system second/new revision
Bayonet Neill-Concelman (connector type) bits per second
Bootstrap processor
Built to order column address strobe compact disk compact disk read-only memory compact disk system color graphics adapter
1-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Acronym or
Abbreviation
EIA
EISA
EPP
EIDE
DRAM
DRQ
DVI dword
EDID
EDO
EEPROM
EGA
DDC
DDR
DIMM
DIN
DIP
DMA
DMI dpi
CPQ
CPU
CRIMM
CRT
CSM
DAC
DC
DCH
Ch cm
CMC
CMOS
Cntlr
Cntrl codec
Technical Reference Guide
Introduction
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description
Channel, chapter centimeter cache/memory controller complimentary metal-oxide semiconductor (configuration memory) controller control
1. coder/decoder 2. compressor/decompressor
Compaq central processing unit
Continuity (blank) RIMM cathode ray tube
1. Compaq system management 2. Compaq server management digital-to-analog converter direct current
DOS compatibility hole
Display Data Channel
Double data rate (memory) dual inline memory module
Deutche IndustriNorm (connector type) dual inline package direct memory access
Desktop management interface dots per inch dynamic random access memory data request
Digital video interface
Double word (32 bits) extended display identification data extended data out (RAM type) electrically eraseable PROM enhanced graphics adapter
Electronic Industry Association extended ISA enhanced parallel port enhanced IDE
361834-002 1-5
Introduction
1-6
Acronym or
Abbreviation in
INT
I/O
IPL
IEEE
IF
I/F
IGC hex
Hz
ICH
IDE
GART
GUI h
HW
IrDA
IRQ
ISA
FPU
FPS ft
GB
GMCH
GND
GPIO
GPOC
ESCD
EV
ExCA
FIFO
FL
FM
FPM
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description
Extended System Configuration Data (format)
Environmental Variable (data)
Exchangeable Card Architecture first in/first out flag (register) frequency modulation fast page mode (RAM type)
Floating point unit (numeric or math coprocessor)
Frames per second
Foot/feet gigabyte
Graphics/memory controller hub ground general purpose I/O general purpose open-collector
Graphics address re-mapping table graphic user interface hexadecimal hardware hexadecimal
Hertz (cycles-per-second)
I/O controller hub integrated drive element
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers interrupt flag interface integrated graphics controller inch interrupt input/output initial program loader
Infrared Data Association interrupt request industry standard architecture
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Acronym or
Abbreviation
NIC
NiMH
NMI
NRZI ns
NT
NTSC
NVRAM
MMX
MPEG ms
MSb/MSB mux
MVA
MVW n
OS
PAL
PATA
LCD
LED
LPC
LSI
LSb/LSB
LUN m
MCH
Kb/KB
Kb/s kg
KHz kV lb
LAN
Technical Reference Guide
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description kilobits/kilobytes (x 1024 bits/x 1024 bytes) kilobits per second kilogram kilohertz kilovolt pound local area network liquid crystal display light-emitting diode
Low pin count large scale integration least significant bit/least significant byte logical unit (SCSI)
Meter
Memory controller hub multimedia extensions
Motion Picture Experts Group millisecond most significant bit/most significant byte multiplex motion video acceleration motion video window variable parameter/value network interface card/controller nickel-metal hydride non-maskable interrupt
Non-return-to-zero inverted nanosecond nested task flag
National Television Standards Committee non-volatile random access memory operating system
1. programmable array logic 2. phase alternating line
Parallel ATA
361834-002
Introduction
1-7
Introduction
1-8
Acronym or
Abbreviation
RTC
R/W
SATA
SCSI
SDR
SDRAM
SDVO
SEC
RAS rcvr
RDRAM
RGB
RH
RMS
ROM
RPM
SECAM
SF
SGRAM
PFC
PIN
PIO
PN
POST
PROM
PTR
RAM
PC
PCA
PCI
PCI-E
PCM
PCMCIA
PEG
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description
Personal computer
Printed circuit assembly peripheral component interconnect
PCI Express pulse code modulation
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PCI express graphics
Power factor correction personal identification number
Programmed I/O
Part number power-on self test programmable read-only memory pointer random access memory row address strobe receiver
(Direct) Rambus DRAM red/green/blue (monitor input)
Relative humidity root mean square read-only memory revolutions per minute real time clock
Read/Write
Serial ATA small computer system interface
Singles data rate (memory)
Synchronous Dynamic RAM
Serial digital video output
Single Edge-Connector sequential colour avec memoire (sequential color with memory) sign flag
Synchronous Graphics RAM
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Acronym or
Abbreviation
TTL
TV
TX
UART
UDMA
URL us/ µs
USB
TFT
TIA
TPE
TPI
TAD
TAFI
TCP
TF
UTP
V
VAC
SPDIF
SPN
SPP
SRAM
SSE
STN
SVGA
SW
SIMD
SIMM
SMART
SMI
SMM
SMRAM
SPD
Technical Reference Guide
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description
Single instruction multiple data single in-line memory module
Self Monitor Analysis Report Technology system management interrupt system management mode system management RAM serial presence detect
Sony/Philips Digital Interface (IEC-958 specification)
Spare part number standard parallel port static RAM
Streaming SIMD extensions super twist pneumatic super VGA software telephone answering device
Temperature-sensing And Fan control Integrated circuit tape carrier package trap flag thin-film transistor
Telecommunications Information Administration twisted pair ethernet track per inch transistor-transistor logic television transmit universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
Ultra DMA
Uniform resource locator microsecond
Universal Serial Bus unshielded twisted pair volt
Volts alternating current
361834-002
Introduction
1-9
Introduction
Acronym or
Abbreviation
VDC
VESA
VGA
VLSI
VRAM
W
WOL
WRAM
ZF
ZIF
Table 1-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Description
Volts direct current
Video Electronic Standards Association video graphics adapter very large scale integration
Video RAM watt
Wake-On-LAN
Windows RAM zero flag zero insertion force (socket)
1-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
2
System Overview
2.1 Introduction
The HP Compaq dc71xx and dx61xx Series Business Desktop Computers (Figure 2-1) deliver an outstanding combination of manageability, serviceability, and compatibility for enterprise environments. Based on the Intel Pentium 4 processor with the Intel 915G Chipset, these systems emphasize performance along with industry compatibility. These models feature architectures incorporating the PCI bus. All models are easily upgradeable and expandable to keep pace with the needs of the office enterprise.
HP Compaq dc7100 USDT
HP Compaq dc7100 SFF
HP Compaq dx61xx ST HP Compaq dx61xx MT HP Compaq dc7100 CMT
Figure 2-1. HP Compaq dx61xx and dc71xx Series Business Desktop Computers
This chapter includes the following topics:
■
■
■
■
Features (2.2), page 2-2
Mechanical design (2.3), page 2-4
System architecture (2.4), page 2-22
Specifications (2.5), page 2-29
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-1
System Overview
2.2 Features And Options
This section describes the standard features.
2.2.1 Standard Features
■
■
The following standard features are included on all series inless otherwise indicated:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Intel Pentium 4 processor in LGA775 (Socket T) package
Integrated graphics controller
PC2700 and PC3200 DIMMs support on dx6100 and dc7100 models
PC2-4300 DIMM support on dx6120 models
IDE controller providing serial and parallel ATA support
Hard drive fault prediction
Eight USB 2.0 ports
Audio processor with one headphone output, one microphone input, and one line input
Network interface controller providing 10/100/1000Base T support
Plug 'n Play compatible (with ESCD support)
Intelligent Manageability support
Energy Star compliant
Security features including:
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Flash ROM Boot Block
Diskette drive disable, boot disable, write protect
Power-on password
Administrator password
Serial/parallel port disable
PS/2 enhanced keyboard
PS/2 scroll mouse
2-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
Table 2-1 shows the differences in features between the different PC series based on form factor:
Series
System Board Type
Serial and parallel ports
Memory:
# of sockets
Maximum memory
Memory type
Table 2-1
Difference Matrix by Form Factor
USDT dc7100 custom
Optional [1]
SFF dc7100 custom
Standard
ST MT dx6100 / dx6120 dx6100 / dx6120 custom µATX
Standard Standard
CMT dc7100
µATX
Standard
3
3 GB
DDR
4
4 GB
DDR
4
4 GB
DDR / DDR2
4
4 GB
DDR / DDR2
4
4 GB
DDR
Drive bays:
Externally accessible
Internal
PCI Express slots: x16 graphics x1
PCI 2.3 slots
1
1
0
0
1full-height
2
1
1 [2] [3]
1 [3]
2 half-height or
2 full-height [5]
Optional [7]
Both
2
1
1 [2] [3]
1 [3]
2 half-height or
2 full-height [5]
Optional [7]
No
3
2
1 [4]
1
2 full-height
MultiBay
Smart Cover Sensor / Lock
Power Supply:
Power rating
PFC
Auto-ranging
Standard
Sensor only
200-watt
Active PFC
Yes
240-watt
Active PFC
Yes
240-watt
Active PFC
Yes not supported
No
300-watt [8]
Passive PFC
No
NOTE:
[1] Supported on system board. Requires optional cable/bracket assembly.
[2] Accepts low-profile, reversed-layout ADD2/SDVO card: height = 2.5 in., length = 6.6 in.
[3] Slot not accessible in configuration using PCI riser card.
[4] Accepts standard height, normal (non-reversed) layout ADD2/SDVO card: height = 4.2 in., length = 10.5 in.
[5] Riser card configuration is a field option. Full-height PCI slots provided with configuration using PCI riser card.
Half-height dimensions: height = 2.5 in., length = 6.6 in.
Full-hieght dimensions: height = 4.2 in., length = 6.875 in
[6] PCI expansion board required for 4-slot support.
Full-height dimensions:
[7] Requires adapter.
[8] Some MT SKUs shipped with 340-watt power supplies.
4
2
1 [4]
1
2 full-height or
4 full-height [6]
Optional [7]
Both
340-watt
Active PFC
Yes
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-3
System Overview
■
■
■
■
This guide covers six form factors:
■ Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT)—Very slim design that can be used in a tradition desktop
(horizontal) orientation or as a small tower mounted in the supplied tower stand.
Small Form Factor (SFF)—A small-footprint desktop requiring minimal desk space.
Slim Tower (ST)—Slim design that can be used in a tradition desktop (horizontal) orientation or as a small tower mounted in the supplied tower stand.
Microtower (MT)- A low-height tower that requires less vertical space than a minitower.
Convertible Minitower (CMT) —an ATX-type unit providing the most expandability and being adaptable to desktop (horizontal) or floor-standing (vertical) placement.
The following subsections describe the mechanical (physical) aspects of models.
Ä CAUTION: Voltages are present within the system unit whenever the unit is plugged into a live AC outlet, regardless of the system's “Power On” condition. Always disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and/or from the system unit before handling the system unit in any way.
✎
The following information is intended primarily for identification purposes only. Before servicing these systems, refer to the applicable Service Reference Guide. Service personnel should review training materials also available on these products.
2-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.3.1 Cabinet Layouts
Front Views
Figure 2-2 shows the front panel components of the Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT) format factor.
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
MultiBay device bay
MultiBay device eject lever
Microphone audio In jack
Headphone audio Out jack
Figure 2-2. HP Compaq dc7100 USDT Front View
7
8
Item
5
6
Decription
USB ports 7, 8
Power LED
MultiBay device / HD activity LED
Power button
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-5
System Overview
Figure 2-3 shows the front panel components of the Small Form Factor (SFF).
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Diskette drive activity LED
Diskette drive media door
CD-ROM drive acitvity LED
Diskette drive eject button
CD-ROM media tray
CD-ROM drive open/close button
Figure 2-3. HP Compaq dc7100 SFF Front View
9
10
11
12
Item
7
8
Decription
Microphone audio In jack
Headphone audio Out jack
USB ports 7, 8
Hard drive activity LED
Power LED
Power button
2-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Figure 2-4 shows the front panel components of the Slim Tower (ST) form factor.
System Overview
4
5
6
2
3
Item
1
Description
Micorphone audio In jack
Headphone audio Out jack
USB ports 7, 8 hard drive activity LED
Power LED
Power button
Figure 2-4. HP Compaq dx6100 ST Front View
10
11
12
8
9
Item
7
Decription
Diskette drive activity LED
Diskette media door
CD-ROM drive acitvity LED
Diskette drive eject button
CD-ROM media tray
CD-ROM drive open/close button
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-7
System Overview
Figure 2-5 shows the front panel components of the microtower (uT) form factor.
4
5
6
2
3
Item
1
Description
CD-ROM drive
CD-ROM drive activity LED
Diskette drive media door
Diskette drive activity LED
Diskette drive eject button
USB ports 7, 8
Figure 2-5. HP Compaq dx6100 MT Front View
10
11
12
8
9
Item
7
Decription
CD-ROM drive open/close button
Power button
Power LED
Hard drive activity LED
Headphone audio Out jack
Microphone audio In jack
2-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
Figure 2-6 shows the front panel components of the Convertable Minitower (CMT) form factor.
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
CD-ROM drive
CD-ROM drive activity LED
Diskette drive media door
Diskette drive activity LED
Diskette drive eject button
Hard drive activity LED
Figure 2-6. HP Compaq dc7100 CMT Front View
9
10
11
12
Item
7
8
Decription
CD-ROM drive open/close button
Power button
Power LED
USB ports 7, 8
Headphone audio Out jack
Microphone audio In jack
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-9
System Overview
Rear Views
Figure 2-7 shows the rear view of the USDT form factor.
4
5
2
3
Item
1
Description
NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
VGA monitor connector (DB-15)
AC input connector
USB ports 1, 2
USB ports 3 - 6
Figure 2-7. HP Compaq dc7100 USDT, Rear View
9
--
7
8
Item
6
Description
Mouse connector (PS/2)
Keyboard connector (PS/2)
Line audio In
Headphone / Speaker audio Out
--
2-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
Figure 2-8 shows the rear views of the SFF form factor. Two configurations are available:
■
■
Without cardcage - Accepts two half-height PCI 2.3 cards, two half-height PCI Express cards
With card cage - Accepts two full-height PCI 2.3 cards only
SFF chassis without card cage
SFF Chassis with card cage
4
5
6
2
3
Item
1
Description
NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
USB ports 3 - 6
Parallel port (DB-25)
Serial port (DB-9)
AC input connector
USB ports 1, 2
Figure 2-8. HP Compaq dc7100 SFF, Rear Views
10
11
--
8
9
Item
7
Description
VGA monitor connector (DB-15)
Mouse connector (PS/2)
Keyboard connector (PS/2)
Line audio In
Headphone / Speaker audio Out
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-11
System Overview
Figure 2-9 shows the rear views of the ST form factor. Two configurations are available:
■
■
Without cardcage - Accepts two half-height PCI 2.3 cards, two half-height PCI Express cards
With card cage - Accepts two full-height PCI 2.3 cards only
2-12
ST chassis without card cage ST chassis with card cage
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
AC input connector
Parallel port (DB-25)
USB ports 3 - 6
NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
Serial port (DB-9)
Headphone / Speaker audio Out
Figure 2-9. HP Compaq dc7100 ST, Rear Views
9
10
11
--
Item
7
8
Description
Line audio In
Keyboard connector (PS/2)
Mouse connector (PS/2)
VGA monitor connector (DB-15)
USB ports 1, 2
--
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Figure 2-10 shows the rear view of the MT form factor.
System Overview
5
6
3
4
7
Item
1
2
Description
AC voltage select switch [1]
AC line connector Microphone In jack
Keyboard connector (PS/2)
Serial port connector (DB-9)
VGA monitor connector (B-15)
Microphone In jack
USB ports 5, 6
NOTE:
[1] Switch not present on SKUs that feature auto-ranging power supply.
10
11
12
13
--
Item
8
9
Figure 2-10. HP Compaq dx6100 MT, Rear View
Description
Mouse connector (PS/2)
Parallel port connctor (DB-25)
USB ports 1 - 4
Line audio Out jack
Line audio In jack
NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-13
System Overview
Figure 2-11 shows the rear view of the CMT form factor.
2-14
4
5
6
2
3
Item
1
Description
USB ports 5, 6
Microphone audio In
VGA monitor connector (DB-15)
Serial port connector (DB-9)
Keyboard connector (PS/2))
AC line connector
Figure 2-11. HP Compaq dc7100 CMT, Rear View
10
11
12
8
9
Item
7
Description
Mouse connector (PS/2)
Parallel port connector (DB-25)
USB ports 1-4
Line audio Out jack
Line audio In jack
NIC (LAN) connector (RJ-45)
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.3.2 Chassis Layouts
This section describes the internal layouts of the chassis. For detailed information on servicing the chassis refer to the multimedia training and/or the maintenance and service guide for these systems.
UIltra Slim Desktop Chassis
The Ultra Slim Desktop (USDT) chassis used for the HP Compaq dc7100 models uses a compact, space-saving form factor.
1 2 3
7
4
6 5
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Power supply assembly
DIMM sockets (3)
PCI card cage
Processor socket
Figure 2-12. USDT Chassis Layout, TopView
7
--
Item
5
6
Description
Chassis fan
MultiBay device
Hard drive
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-15
System Overview
Small Form Factor / Slim Tower Chassis
■
■
The chassis layouts for the Small Form Factor (SFF) used for the HP Compaq dc7100 models and the Slim Tower (ST) used for the HP Comapq dx6100 models are shown in Figure 2-13.
Features include:
Tilting drive cage assembly for easy access to processor and memory sockets
Two configurations:
❏ Without card cage:
◆
◆
◆
Two half-height, full length PCI 2.3 slots
One PCI Express x16 graphics/SDVO slot
One PCI Express x1 slot
❏ With card cage:
◆ Two full-height, full-length PCI 2.3 slots
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 6
2-16
9 8
Chassis without card cage
7 9 8
Chassis with card cage
7
4
5
2
3
Item
1
Description
Power supply assembly
DIMM sockets (4)
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI Express x16 graphics/reverse-layout slot [1]
PCI 2.3 slots (2)
7
8
Item
6
9
10
NOTE:
[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or reversed-layout ADD2 card.
Figure 2-13. SFF / ST Chassis Layout, Top / Right Side Views
Description
Card cage
Processor socket
Chassis fan
Diskette drive bay
CD-ROM drive bay
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
Microtower Chassis
Figure 2-14 shows the layout for the Microtower (MT) chassis used for the HP Compaq dx6100 models. Features include:
■
■
Externally accessible drive bay assembly.
Easy access to expansion slots and all socketed system board components.
1 2 3 4
5
6 q
-
9
8
7
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Power supply assembly
Processor socket
DIMM sockets (4)
DriveLock
Externally accessible drive bays
Internally accessible drive bays
9
10
11
--
Item
7
8
NOTE:
[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or normal-layout ADD2 card.
Figure 2-14. MT Chassis Layout, Left Side View
Description
Speaker
PCI 2.3 slots
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot [1]
Chassis fan
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-17
System Overview
Convertible Minitower
Figure 2-15 shows the layout for the Convertible Minitower (CMT) chassis in the minitower configuration used for HP Compaq dc7100 models. Features include:
■ Externally accessible drive bay assembly may be configured for minitower (vertical) or desktop (horizontal) position.
■ Easy access to expansion slots and all socketed system board components.
1 2 3 4
5
6 w q
-
9
8
7
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Power supply assembly
Processor socket
DIMM sockets (4)
DriveLock
Externally accessible drive bays
Internally accessible drive bays
9
10
11
12
Item
7
8
Description
Speaker (inside card guide assembly)
Expansion board area
PCI 2.3 slots
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot [1]
Chassis fan
NOTE:
[1] Accepts PCI-E graphics or normal-layout ADD2 card.
Figure 2-15. CMT Chassis Layout, Left Side View (Minitower configuration)
2-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.3.3 Board Layouts
Figures 2-16 through 2-18 show the system and expansion boards for these systems.
1 2 3 o i u y t r e w q
NOTE: See USDT rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Hood sense header
Battery
Parallel port option header
Serial port A header
Password clear jumper header
SATA #0 header
PCI 2.3 slot
Intenal speaker header
Power supply (VccP) connector
Processor socket
Figure 2-16. USDT System Board
4
5
6
7
8
9
-
17
18
19
--
13
14
15
16
Item
11
12
Description
Power button, power LED, HD LED header
Front panel audio connector
Front panel USB port connector
Chassis fan, secondary connector
Chassis fan, primary connector
DIMM sockets (3)
MultiBay riser connector
Power supply connector
Auxiliary audio input connector
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-19
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g f d s a p o i u y t r e w q
9
-
11
12
13
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
Item
1
2
Description
Serial port B header
Battery
SATA #1 header
SATA #0 header
Password jumper
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI Express x16 graphics/reversed-layout SDVO slot
PCI 2.3 slots
Power supply (VccP) connector
Processor socket
Chassis fan, primary connector
Chassis fan, secondary conenctor
Power button, power LED, HD LED header
24
25
--
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Item
14
15
NOTE:
See SFF and ST rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.
Figure 2-17. SFF / ST System Board
Description
Front panel audio header
Chassis speaker connector
Front panel USB port connector
MultiBay connector
DIMM sockets (4)
CD-Audio input connector
Diskette drive connector
PATA (primary IDE) connector
Auxiliary audio input connector
Power supply connector
Cover lock (solenoid) connector
Cover sensor connector
--
2-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
1 z l k j h g f d s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PCI Expansion Board [1] a p o i u y t r e
System Board w q
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Item
1
Description
PCI 2.3 slots
Battery
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI Express x16 graphics/normal-layout SDVO slot
Chassis fan header
Power supply (VccP) connector
Serial port B header [2]
Processor socket
Processor fan connector
DIMM sockets (4)
MultiBay conector [2]
Diskette drive connector
Parallel ATA connector
Power supply connector
Serial ATA #3 connector [2]
27
28
29
--
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
Item
16
17
18
Description
Serial ATA #2 connector [2]
Serial ATA #0 connector
Hood lock header [2]
Hood sense header [2]
Password clear jumper header
Power LED/button, HD LED header
Serial ATA #1 connector
CMOS clear switch
Internal speaker connector
Auxiliary audio inpout connector
CD audio input connector
Front panel USB port connector
PCI expansion board connector [2]
Front panel audio connector
--
NOTES:
See MT and CMT rear chassis illustrations for externally accessible I/O connectors.
[1] Applicable to CMT chassis only.
[2] Not included on MT system boards.
Figure 2-18. MT / CMT System Board and CMT PCI Expansion Board
8
9
-
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-21
System Overview
The systems covered in this guide feature an architecture based on the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 915G chipset (Figure 2-11). These systems allow processor upgrading with the Intel
Pentium 4 family and offer flexibility in expansion capabilities.
■
■
■
All systems covered in this guide include the following key components:
■
■
Intel Pentium 4 with Hyper-Threading technology, 32-KB L1 cache and 1-MB L2 cache.
Intel 915G/GV chipset - Includes 82915G or 82915GV GMCH north bridge and 82801
ICH6 south bridge including an integrated graphics controller, dual-channel DDR1 or DDR2
SDRAM controller, serial and parallel ATA controllers, USB 2.0 controller, and PCI controller supporting PCI 2.3 devices.
SMC 47B397 super I/O controller supporting PS/2 keyboard and mouse peripherals
AD1981B audio controller supporting line in, speaker out, and headphone out
Broadcom BCM5751 10/100/1000 network interface controller
The 915G/GV chipset provides a major portion of system functionality. Designed to compliment the latest Intel Pentium 4 processors, the chipset serves the processor through a 800-MB
Front-Side Bus (FSB). Communication between the GMCH and ICH6 components occurs through the Direct Media Interface (DMI). The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors use the integrated graphics controller of the 82915G that may be upgraded through a PCI Express x16 graphics slot. All systems include a PCI 2.3 slot, and feature as standard a serial ATA (SATA) hard drive with support for legacy parallel ATA 100 devices including a MultiBay device.
Table 2-2 lists the differences between models.
Model
Chipset
Memory sockets
DDR2 models?
Graphics upgrade
PCI Express x16 graphics slot?
PCI Express x1 slot?
Serial / parallel ports
SATA interfaces
Table 2-2.
Architectural Differences By Form Factor
USDT
915GV
3
No
PCI 2.3 card only
No
SFF
915G
4
Yes
PCI-E or
PCI 2.3 card
Yes [1]
ST
915G
4
Yes
PCI-E or
PCI 2.3 card
Yes [1]
MT
915G
4
Yes
PCI-E or
PCI 2.3 card
Yes
CMT
915G
4
Yes
PCI-E or
PCI 2.3 card
Yes
No Yes [1] Yes [1] Yes Yes
Optional [2] Standard [3] Standard [3] Standard [3] Standard [3]
1 2 2 4 4
Notes:
[1] Slot not accessible if PCI 2.3 full-height riser is installed.
[2] Requires adapter.
[3] 2nd serial port requires adapter.
2-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
Pentium 4
Processor
Monitor
RGB
PCI Express x16 slot (PEG)[1]
915G/GV Chipset
Graphics
Cntlr.
915 [2]
GMCH
SDRAM
Cntlr
PCI Exp.
PEG I/F [1]
DMI
Ch A DDR/DDR2
SDRAM
Ch B DDR/DDR2
SDRAM
SATA
Hard Drive
MultiBay Device
CD-ROM
AC97 Audio
Subsystem
SATA
I/F
DMI
USB
I/F
PATA
I/F
82801
ICH6
LPC I/F
AC97 I/F
PCI Cntlr.
USB Ports 1-8
Serial I/F [1] Parallel I/F [1]
LPC47B397
I/O Cntlr.
Kybd-Mouse I/F Diskette I/F
PCI 2.3 slot(s)
NIC
I/F
PCI Express x1 slot [1]
Note:
[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.
[2] 82915GV for USDT form factor
82915G for SFF. ST. MT, and CMT form factors
Keyboard
Mouse
Floppy
Power Supply
Figure 2-19 System Architecture, Block diagram
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-23
System Overview
2.4.1 Intel Pentium 4 Processor
The models covered in this guide feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor with Hyper-Threading technology. This processor is backward-compatible with software written for the Pentium III,
Pentium II, Pentium MMX, Pentium Pro, Pentium, and x86 microprocessors. The processor architecture includes a floating-point unit, 32-KB first and 1-MB secondary caches, and enhanced performance for multimedia applications through the use of multimedia extension
(MMX) instructions. Also included are streaming SIMD extensions (SSE and SSE2) for enhancing 3D graphics and speech processing performance. The Pentium 4 processor features
Net-Burst Architecture that uses hyper-pipelined technology and a rapid-execution engine that runs at twice the processor's core speed.
These systems employ a zero-insertion-force (ZIF) Socket-T designed for mounting an LGA775 processor package (Figure 2-20).
2-24
Figure 2-20. Processor Socket and Processor Package
To remove the processor:
1. Remove the processore heat sink/fan assembly (not shown).
2. Release the locking lever (1) by first pushing down, then out and up.
3. Pull up the securing frame (2).
4. Grasp the processor (3) by the edges and lift straight up from the socket.
✎
The processor heatsink/fan assembly mounting differs between form factors. Always use the same assembly or one of the same type when replacing the processor. Refer to the applicable
Service Reference Guide for detailed removal and replacement procedures of the heatsink/fan assembly and the processor.
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.4.2 Chipset
The chipset consists of a Graphics Memory Controller Hub (GMCH), an enhanced I/O controller hub (ICH), and a firmware hub (FWH). Table 2-3 compares the functions provided by the chipsets.
Components
82915G/GV GMCH
82801EB ICH6
Table 2-3
Chipset Components
Function
Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 900 (integrated graphics controller)
PCI Express x16 graphics interface (915G only)
SDRAM controller supporting unbuffered, non-ECC PC2700/PC3200
DDR or PC2-3200/PC2-4300 DDR2 DIMMs (depending on model)
533-, or 800-MHz FSB
PCI 2.3 bus I/F
PCI Express x1
LPC bus I/F
SMBus I/F
IDE I/F with SATA and PATA support
AC ’97 controller
RTC/CMOS
IRQ controller
Power management logic
USB 1.1/2.0 controllers supporting eight (8) ports
Loaded with HP/Compaq BIOS 82802 FWH [1]
NOTE:
[1] Or equivalent component.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-25
System Overview
2.4.3 Support Components
Input/output functions not provided by the chipset are handled by other support components.
Some of these components also provide “housekeeping” and various other functions as well.
Table 2-4 shows the functions provided by the support components.
Component Name
LPC47B397 I/O Controller
BCM5751 Ethernet Controller
AD1981B Audio Codec
Table 2-4
Support Component Functions
Function
Keyboard and pointing device I/F
Diskette I/F
Serial I/F (COM1and COM2)
Parallel I/F (LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3)
PCI reset generation
Interrupt (IRQ) serializer
Power button and front panel LED logic
GPIO ports
Processor over tempurature monitoring
Fan control and monitoring
Power supply voltage monitoring
SMBus and Low Pin Count (LPC) bus I/F
10/100/1000 Fast Ethernet network interface controller.
Audio mixer
Digital-to-analog converter
Analog-to-digital converter
Analog I/O
6-channel audio support
2.4.4 System Memory
These systems implement a dual-channel Double Data Rate (DDR) memory architecture. All dx6100 and dc7100 models support PC2700 (333- MHz) and PC3200 (400-MHz) DIMMs. Only dx6120 models support DDR2, PC2-4300 (533-MHz) DIMMs.
✎
DDR and DDR2 DIMMs are NOT interchangeable. Memory type is defined by the system board.
The USDT system provides three DIMM sockets supporting up to 3 GB of memory while all other form factors provide four DIMM sockets and support a total of four gigabytes of memory.
✎
The maximum memory amounts stated above are with 1-GB memory modules using 1-Gb technology DIMMs.
2-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.4.5 Mass Storage
All models support at least two mass storage devices, with one being externally accessible for removable media. These systems provide one, two, or four SATA interfaces and one PATA interface. These systems may be preconfigured or upgraded with a 40-, 80-, or 160-GB SATA hard drive and one removable media drive such as a CD-ROM drive. Some systems also provide one MultiBay interface.
2.4.6 Serial and Parallel Interfaces
All models except those that use the USDT form factor include a serial port and a parallel port, both of which are accessible at the rear of the chassis. The USDT form factor may be upgraded with an adapter to provide serial and parallel ports. The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors may be upgraded with an optional second serial port.
The serial interface is RS-232-C/16550-compatible and supports standard baud rates up to
115,200 as well as two high-speed baud rates of 230K and 460K. The parallel interface is
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP1.9) and Enhanced Capability Port (ECP) compatible, and supports bi-directional data transfers.
2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface
All models provide eight Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, with two ports accessible at the front of the unit and six ports accessible on the rear panel. The USB interface provides hot plugging/unplugging functionality. These systems support USB 1.1 and 2.0 functionality on all ports.
2.4.8 Network Interface Controller
All models feature a Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Network Interface Controller (NIC) integrated on the system board. The controller provides automatic selection of 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T operation with a local area network and includes power-down, wake-up, and Alert-On-LAN (AOL), and Alert Standard Format (ASF) features. An RJ-45 connector with status LEDs is provided on the rear panel.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-27
System Overview
2.4.9 Graphics Subsystem
These systems use the 82915G or 82915GV GMCH component that integrates an Intel graphics controller that can drive an external VGA monitor. The integrated graphics controller (IGC) features a 333-MHz core processor and a 400-MHz RAMDAC. The controller implements
Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT 3.0) for video memory. Table 2-5 lists the key features of the integrated graphics subsystem.
Recommended for:
Bus Type
Memory Amount
Memory Type
DAC Speed
Maximum 2D Res.
Software Compatibility
Outputs
Table 2-5
Integrated Graphics Subsystem Statistics
82915G or GV GMCH
Integrated Graphics Controller
Hi 2D, Entry 3D
Int. PCI Express
8 MB pre-allocated
DVMT 3.0
400 MHz
2048x1536 @ 85 Hz
Quick Draw,
DirectX 9.0,
Direct Draw,
Direct Show,
Open GL 1.4,
MPEG 1-2,
Indeo
1 RGB
The IGC of the 82915G used in the SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors supports upgrading through a PCI Express x16 graphics slot. The IGC of the 82915GV used in the USDT form factor does not support a PCI Express x16 graphic slot and may only be upgraded through the
PCI 2.3 slot.
2.4.10 Audio Subsystem
These systems use the integrated AC97 audio controller of the chipset and the ADI 1981B audio codec. These systems include microphone and line inputs and headphone and line outputs and include a 3-watt output amplifier driving an internal speaker. All models feature front panel-accessible microphone in and headphone out audio jacks as standard.
2-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Overview
2.5 Specifications
This section includes the environmental, electrical, and physical specifications for the systems covered in this guide. Where provided, metric statistics are given in parenthesis. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Table 2-6
Environmental Specifications (Factory Configuration)
Parameter Operating Non-operating
Ambient Air Temperature 50 o to 95 o F (10 o to 35 o C, max. rate of change < 10 °C/Hr)
Shock (w/o damage) 5 Gs [1]
Vibration 0.000215 G 2 /Hz, 10-300 Hz
Humidity
-24 o to 140 o F (-30 o to 60 o C, max. rate of change < 20
20 Gs [1]
0.0005 G 2
°C/Hr )
/Hz, 10-500 Hz
Maximum Altitude
10-90% Rh @ 28 o C max.
wet bulb temperature
10,000 ft (3048 m) [2]
5-95% Rh @ 38.7
o C max.
wet bulb temperature
30,000 ft (9144 m) [2]
NOTE:
[1] Peak input acceleration during an 11 ms half-sine shock pulse.
[2] Maximum rate of change: 1500 ft/min.
Parameter
Input Line Voltage:
Nominal:
Maximum:
Input Line Frequency Range:
Nominal:
Maximum:
Power Supply:
Maximum Continuous Power:
USDT
ST or SFF
MT
CMT
Maximum Line Current Draw:
USDT
SF or SFF
MT
CMT
Table 2-7
Electrical Specifications
U.S.
100–240 VAC
90–264 VAC
50–60 Hz
47–63 Hz
200 watts
240 watts
300 watts [1]
340 watts
4 A @ 100 VAC
5 A @ 100 VAC
8 A @ 100 VAC
6 A @ 100 VAC
NOTES:
[1] Some MT SKUs shpped with 340-watt power supplies.
International
100–240 VAC
90–264 VAC
50–60 Hz
47–63 Hz
200 watts
240 watts
300 watts [1]
340 watts
2 A @ 200 VAC
2.5 A @ 200 VAC
4 A @ 200 VAC
3.0 A @ 200 VAC
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-29
System Overview
Parameter USDT ST
Width
Depth
(7.49 cm)
12.4 in
(31.5 cm)
(10.03 cm)
13.3 in
(33.78 cm)
13.18 in
(33.48 cm)
14.9 in
(37.85 cm)
Weight [1] 13.2 lb [2]
(6.0 kg) [2]
19.5 lb
(8.8 kg)
Load-bearing ability of chassis [4]
100 lb
(45.4 kg)
100 lb
(45.4 kg)
Table 2-8
Physical Specifications
SFF
3.95 in
(10.03 cm)
13.3 in
(33.78 cm)
14.9 in
(37.85 cm)
19.5 lb
(8.8 kg)
100 lb
(45.4 kg)
MT
14.5 in
(36.8 cm)
6.88 in
17.5 cm)
16.31 in
(41.1 cm)
23.8 lb
(10.8 kg) n/a
CMT [3]
17.65 in
(44.8 cm)
6.60 in
(16.8 cm)
17.8 in
(45.21 cm)
32.5 lb
(14.7 kg)
100 lb
(45.4 kg)
NOTES:
[1] System weight may vary depending on installed drives/peripherals.
[2] Without MultiBay device installed.
[3] Minitower configuration. For desktop configuration, swap Height and Width dimensions.
[4] Applicable To unit in desktop orientation only and assumes reasonable type of load such as a monitor.
2-30 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Table 2-9
Diskette Drive Specifications
Parameter
Media Type
Measurement
3.5 in 1.44 MB/720 KB diskette
1/3 bay (1 in)
512
Height
Bytes per Sector
Sectors per Track:
High Density
Low Density
Tracks per Side:
High Density
Low Density
18
9
80
80
2 Read/Write Heads
Average Access Time:
Track-to-Track (high/low)
Average (high/low)
Settling Time
Latency Average
3 ms/6 ms
94 ms/169 ms
15 ms
100 ms
System Overview
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-31
System Overview
Parameter
Interface Type
Media Type (reading)
Media Type (writing)
Transfer Rate (Reads)
Transfer Rate (Writes):
Capacity:
Mode 1, 12 cm
Mode 2, 12 cm
8 cm
Center Hole Diameter
Disc Diameter
Disc Thickness
Track Pitch
Laser
Beam Divergence
Output Power
Type
Wave Length
Average Access Time:
Random
Full Stroke
Audio Output Level
Cache Buffer
Table 2-10
Optical Drive Specifications
48x CD-ROM
IDE
Mode 1,2, Mixed Mode, CD-DA,
Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA
N/a
4.8 Kb/s (max sustained)
N/a
48/24/28x CD-RW Drive
IDE
Mode 1,2, Mixed Mode, CD-DA,
Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA
CD-R, CD-RW
CD-ROM, 4.8 Kb/s;
CD-ROM/CD-R, 1.5-6 Kb/s
CD-R, 2.4 Kbps (sustained);
CD-RW, 1.5 Kbps (sustained);
650 MB @ 12 cm
550 MB
640 MB
180 MB
15 mm
8/12 cm
1.2 mm
1.6 um
15 mm
8/12 cm
1.2 mm
1.6 um
+/- 1.5 °
0.14 mW
GaAs
790 +/- 25 nm
53.5 + 1.5°
53.6 0.14 mW
GaAs
790 +/- 25 nm
<100 ms
<150 ms
0.7 Vrms
128 KB
<120 ms
<200 ms
0.7 Vrms
128 KB
2-32 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Parameter
Drive Size
Interface
Transfer Rate
Drive Protection System
Support?
Typical Seek Time (w/settling)
Single Track
Average
Full Stroke
Disk Format (logical blocks)
Rotation Speed
Drive Fault Prediction
Table 2-11
Hard Drive Specifications
40 GB
3.5 in
80 GB
3.5 in
SATA
150 MB/s
Yes
1.2 ms
8.0 ms
18 ms
78,165,360
5400/7200
SMART III
SATA
150 MB/s
Yes
0.8 ms
9.0 ms
17 ms
156,301,488
5400/7200
SMART III
160 GB
3.5 in
SATA
150 MB/s
Yes
0.8 ms
9 ms
17 ms
320,173,056
7200 RPM
SMART III
System Overview
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 2-33
System Overview
2-34 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
3
Processor/Memory Subsystem
3.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the processor/memory subsystem. These systems feature the Intel
Pentium 4 processor and the 915G chipset (Figure 3-1). The dx6100 and dc7100 models support
PC2700 or PC3200 DDR memory and come standard with PC3200 DIMMs installed. The dx6120 models support PC2-4300 DDR2 DIMMs only.
Pentium 4
Processor
FSB I/F
XMM1
Ch A
DIMM
XMM2 [1]
Ch A
DIMM
82915G
GMCH
SDRAM
Cntrl
Note:
[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT models only.
Figure 3-1. Processor/Memory Subsystem Architecture
This chapter includes the following topics:
■
■
Pentium 4 processor (3.2), page 3-2
Memory subsystem (3.3), page 3-4
Ch B
DIMM
XMM3
Ch B
DIMM
XMM4
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-1
Processor/Memory Subsystem
These systems each feature an Intel Pentium 4 processor in a FC-LGA775 package mounted with a passive heat sink in a zero-insertion force socket. The mounting socket allows the processor to be easily changed for servicing and/or upgrading.
3.2.1 Processor Overview
The Intel Pentium 4 processor represents the latest generation of Intel's IA32-class of processors.
Featuring Intel's NetBurst architecture and Hyper-Threading technology, the Pentium 4 processor is designed for intensive multimedia and internet applications of today and the future while maintaining compatibility with software written for earlier (Pentium III, Pentium II,
Pentium, Celeron, and x86) microprocessors. Key features of the Pentium 4 processor include:
■ Hyper-Threading Technology—The main processing loop has twice the depth (20 stages) of earlier processors allowing for increased processing frequencies.
■ Execution Trace Cache— A new feature supporting the branch prediction mechanism, the trace cache stores translated sequences of branching micro-operations ( ops) and is checked when suspected re-occurring branches are detected in the main processing loop. This feature allows instruction decoding to be removed from the main processing loop.
■ Rapid Execution Engine—Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs) run at twice (2x) processing frequency for higher throughput and reduced latency.
■ 1-MB Advanced transfer L2 cache—Using 32-byte-wide interface at processing speed, the large L2 cache provides a substantial increase.
■ Advanced dynamic execution—Using a larger (4K) branch target buffer and improved prediction algorithm, branch mis-predictions are reduced by an average of 33 % over the
Pentium III.
■ Enhanced Floating Point Processor —With 128-bit integer processing and deeper pipelining the Pentium 4's FPU provides a 2x performance boost over the Pentium III.
■
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Additional Streaming SIMD extensions (SSE2)—In addition to the SSE support provided by previous Pentium processors, the Pentium 4 processor includes an additional 144 MMX instructions, further enhancing:
Streaming video/audio processing
Photo/video editing
Speech recognition
3D processing
Encryption processing
■ Quad-pumped Front Side Bus (FSB)—The FSB uses a 200-MHz clock for qualifying the buses' control signals. However, address information is transferred using a 2x strobe while data is transferred with a 4x strobe, providing a maximum data transfer rate that is four times that of earlier processors.
3-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Processor/Memory Subsystem
Figure 3-2 illustrates the internal architecture of the Intel Pentium 4 processor.
Pentium 4 Processor
Branch
Prediction
Rapid Exe. Eng.
ALUs
16-K Execution
Trace Cache
CPU
Out-of-Order
Core
128-bit
Integer
FPU
8-K
L1
Data
Cache
L2
1-MB
L2
Cache
FSB
I/F
FSB speed (max. data transfer rate) Core speed ALU Speed (Core speed x2)
Pentium Type
P4 560
P4 550
P4 540
P4 530
P4 520
Core Speed
3.60 GHz
3.40 GHz
3.20 GHz
3.00 GHz
2.80 GHz
ALU Speed
7.2 GHz
6.8 GHz
6.4 GHz
6.0 GHz
5.6 GHz
Figure 3-2. Pentium 4 Processor Internal Architecture
FSB Speed
800 MHz
800 MHz
800 MHz
800 MHz
800 MHz
L2 Cache Size
1 MB
1 MB
1 MB
1 MB
1 MB
The Intel Pentium 4 increases processing speed by using higher clock speeds with hyper-pipelined technology, therefore handling significantly more instructions at a time. The
Pentium 4 features a branch prediction mechanism improved with the addition of an execution trace cache and a refined prediction algorithm. The execution trace cache can store 12 kilobytes of micro-ops (decoded instructions dealing with branching sequences) that are checked when re-occurring branches are processed. Code that is not executed (bypassed) is no longer stored in the L1 cache as was the case in the Pentium III.
The front side bus (FSB) of the Pentium 4 uses a 200-MHz clock but provides bi- and quad-pumped transfers through the use of 2x- and 4x-MHz strobes. The Pentium 4 processor is compatible with software written for x86 processors.
3.2.2 Processor Upgrading
All units use the LGA775 ZIF (Socket T) mounting socket. These systems require that the processor use an integrated heatsink/fan assembly. A replacement processor must use the same type heatsink/fan assembly as the original to ensure proper cooling.
The processor uses a PLGA775 package consisting of the processor die mounted “upside down” on a PC board. This arrangement allows the heat sink to come in direct contact with the processor die. The heat sink and attachment clip are specially designed provide maximum heat transfer from the processor component.
Ä CAUTION: Attachment of the heatsink to the processor is critical on these systems. Improper attachment of the heatsink will likely result in a thermal condition. Although the system is designed to detect thermal conditions and automatically shut down, such a condition could still result in damage to the processor component. Refer to the applicable Service Reference Guide for processor installation instructions.
Ä CAUTION: Installing a processor that is not supported by the system board may cause damage to the system board and/or the processor.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-3
Processor/Memory Subsystem
3-4
The dx6100 and dc7100 models support PC2700 or PC3200 DDR memory and come standard with PC3200 DIMMs installed. The dx6120 models support PC2-4300 DDR2 memory only.
✎
The DDR SDRAM “PCxxxx” reference designates bus bandwidth (i.e., a PC2700 DIMM can, operating at a 333-MHz effective speed, provide a throughput of 2700 MBps (8 bytes ×
333MHz)). Memory speed types may be mixed within a system, although the system BIOS will set the memory controller to work at speed of the slowest DIMM.
■
■
The system board provides three or four DIMM sockets depending on form factor:
■
■
XMM1 (black connector), channel A (all form factors
XMM2 (DDR, blue connector; DDR2, white connector), channel A (SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only)
XMM3 (black connector), channel B (all form factors)
XMM4 (DDR, blue connector; DDR2, white connector), channel B (all form factors)
■
■
DIMMs do not need to be installed in pairs although installation of pairs (an equal DIMM for each channel) provides the best performance. The BIOS will detect the DIMM population and set the system accordingly as follows:
Single-channel mode - DIMMs installed for one channel only
Dual-channel asymetric mode - DIMMs installed for both channels but of unequal channel capacities.
■ Dual-channel interleaved mode (recommended)- DIMMs installed for both channels and offering equal channel capacities, proving the highest performance.
These systems require DIMMs with the following parameters:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Unbuffered, compatible with SPD rev. 1.0
256-Mb, 512-Mb, and 1-Gb memory technology x8 and x16 DDR devices
CAS latency (CL) of 2.5 or 3
Single or double-sided
Non-ECC memory only
The SPD format supported by these systems complies with the JEDEC specification for 128-byte
EEPROMs. This system also provides support for 256-byte EEPROMs to include additional
HP-added features such as part number and serial number. The SPD format as supported in this system (SPD rev. 1) is shown in Table 3-1.
If BIOS detects an unsupported DIMM, a “memory incompatible” message will be displayed and the system will halt. These systems are shipped with non-ECC DIMMs only. Refer to chapter 8 for a description of the BIOS procedure of interrogating DIMMs.
An installed mix of DIMM types (i.e., PC2700 and PC3200, CL 2 and CL 3) is acceptable but operation will be constrained to the level of the DIMM with the lowest (slowest) performance specification.
If an incompatible DIMM is detected the NUM LOCK will blink for a short period of time during POST and an error message may or may not be displayed before the system hangs.
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Processor/Memory Subsystem
Table 3-1 shows suggested memory configurations for these systems.
NOTE: Table 3-1 does not list all possible configurations. Balanced-capacity, dual-channel loading yields best performance.
Socket 1
Channel A
Socket 2 [1]
128-MB
128-MB none none
128-MB
128-MB
256-MB
256-MB
128-MB
128-MB none none
512-MB
512-MB
1-GB
1-GB
1-GB
1-GB none none none none
1-GB
1-GB
NOTE:
[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.
Table 3-1.
DIMM Socket Loading
Channel B
Socket 3 Socket 4 none
128-MB
128-MB
128-MB none none none
128-MB none
256-MB none
512-MB none
1-GB
1-GB
1-GB none none none none none none none
1-GB
Total
128-MB
256-MB (dual-channel)
384-MB (dual-channel)
512-MB (dua- channel)
256-MB
512-MB (dual-channel)
512-MB
1-GB (dual-channel)
1-GB
2-GB (dual-channel)
3-GB (dual-channel)
4-GB (dual-channel)
✎
DDR and DDR2 DIMMs are NOT interchangeable. Memory type is defined by the system board.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-5
Processor/Memory Subsystem
The SPD address map is shown in Table 3-2.
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
8
9
5
6, 7
3
4
1
2
0
Byte
20
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
Table 3-2
SPD Address Map (SDRAM DIMM)
Description
No. of Bytes Written Into EEPROM
Total Bytes (#) In EEPROM
Memory Type
No. of Row Addresses On DIMM
No. of Column Addresses On DIMM
No. of Module Banks On DIMM
Data Width of Module
Voltage Interface Standard of DIMM
Cycletime @ Max CAS Latency (CL)
Access From Clock
Config. Type (Parity, Nonparity...)
Refresh Rate/Type
Width, Primary DRAM
Error Checking Data Width
Min. Clock Delay
Burst Lengths Supported
No. of Banks For Each Mem. Device
CAS Latencies Supported
CS# Latency
Write Latency
DIMM Attributes
Memory Device Attributes
Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-1
Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-1
Notes
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[4][5]
[6]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[7]
[7]
25
Byte
26
27
28
29
30-31
32-61
Description
Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-2
Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-2
Min. Row Prechge. Time
Min. Row Active to Delay
Min. RAS to CAS Delay
Reserved
Superset Data
62
63
64-71
72
SPD Revision
Checksum Bytes 0-62
JEP-106E ID Code
DIMM OEM Location
73-90
91-92
93-94
95-98
OEM’s Part Number
OEM’s Rev. Code
Manufacture Date
OEM’s Assembly S/N
OEM Specific Data 99-
125
126
127
128 - 131
Intel frequency check
Reserved
Compaq header “CPQ1”
132 Header checksum
133 - 145 Unit serial number
146
147
148
DIMM ID
Checksum
Reserved
NOTES:
[1] Programmed as 128 bytes by the DIMM OEM
[2] Must be programmed to 256 bytes.
[3] High order bit defines redundant addressing: if set (1), highest order RAS# address must be re-sent as highest order CAS# address.
[4] Refer to memory manufacturer’s datasheet
[5] MSb is Self Refresh flag. If set (1), assembly supports self refresh.
[6] Back-to-back random column addresses.
[7] Field format proposed to JEDEC but not defined as standard at publication time.
[8] Field specified as optional by JEDEC but required by this system.
[9] HP usage. This system requires that the DIMM EEPROM have this space available for reads/writes.
[10] Serial # in ASCII format (MSB is 133). Intended as backup identifier in case vender data is invalid.
Can also be used to indicate s/n mismatch and flag system adminstrator of possible system Tampering.
[11]Contains the socket # of the module (first module is “1”). Intended as backup identifier (refer to note [10]).
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
Notes
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[9]
[9]
[9][10]
[9][11]
[9]
[9]
3-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Processor/Memory Subsystem
Figure 3-3 shows the system memory map.
Main
Memory
Area
FFFF FFFFh
FFE0 0000h
F000 0000h
High BIOS Area
DMI/APIC
Area
4 GB
PCI
Memory
Area
Top of DRAM
0100 0000h
00FF FFFFh
IGC (1-32 MB)
TSEG
Main
Memory
16 MB
Main
Memory
DOS
Compatibilty
Area
0010 0000h
000F FFFFh BIOS
Extended BIOS
Expansion Area
Legacy Video
Base Memory
0000 0000h
1 MB
640 KB
✎
All locations in memory are cacheable. Base memory is always mapped to DRAM. The next 128
KB fixed memory area can, through the north bridge, be mapped to DRAM or to PCI space.
Graphics RAM area is mapped to PCI or AGP locations.
Figure 3-3. System Memory Map
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 3-7
Processor/Memory Subsystem
3-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
4
System Support
4.1 Introduction
This chapter covers subjects dealing with basic system architecture and covers the following topics:
■
■
■
■
■
PCI bus overview (4.2), page 4-1
System resources (4.3), page 4-11
Real-time clock and configuration memory (4.4), page 4-19
System management (4.5), page 4-21
Register map and miscellaneous functions (4.6), page 4-26
This chapter covers functions provided by off-the-shelf chipsets and therefore describes only basic aspects of these functions as well as information unique to the systems covered in this guide. For detailed information on specific components, refer to the applicable manufacturer's documentation.
4.2 PCI Bus Overview
✎
This section describes the PCI bus in general and highlights bus implementation in this particular system. For detailed information regarding PCI bus operation, refer to the appropriate PCI specification or the PCI web site: www.pcisig.com.
These systems implement the following types of PCI buses:
■
■
PCI 2.3 - Legacy parallel interface operating at 33-MHz
PCI Express - High-performance interface capable of using multiple TX/RX high-speed lanes of serial data streams
The PCI bus handles address/data transfers through the identification of devices and functions on the bus. A device is typically defined as a component or slot that resides on the PCI bus (although some components such as the GMCH and ICH6 are organized as multiple devices). A function is defined as the end source or target of the bus transaction. A device may contain one or more functions. In the standard configuration these systems use a hierarchy of three PCI buses (Figure
4-1). The PCI bus #0 is internal to the chipset components and is not physically accessible. The
Direct Media Interface (DMI) links the GMCH and ICH6 components and operates as a subset of the PCI bus. All PCI slots and the NIC function internal to the ICH6 reside on PCI bus #2.
4-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002
System Support
82915G/GV [1]
GMCH
Memory
Cntlr
Function
PCI Bus 0
Host-DMI Bridge
Integrated
Graphics
Controller
Host-PCI Exp.
Bridge
RGB Monitor
PCI Express x16 graphics slot [2]
DMI Link
DMI
PCI 2.3
Bridge
Function
PCI Exp.
Port 1
Function
PCI Exp.
Port 2
82801 ICH6
PCI Bus 1
IDE
Cntlr
Function
SATA
Cntlr
Function
USB I/F
Cntlr
Function
LPC
Bridge
Function
AC97
Cntlr
Function
Function
NIC
Cntlr
PCI Express x1 slot [1]
PCI 2.3 slot(s)
Notes:
[1] USDT form factor; 82915GV; SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors, 82915G
[2] SFF. ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.
Figure 4-1. PCI Bus Devices and Functions
4.2.1 PCI 2.3 Bus Operation
The PCI 2.3 bus consists of a 32-bit path (AD31-00 lines) that uses a multiplexed scheme for handling both address and data transfers. A bus transaction consists of an address cycle and one or more data cycles, with each cycle requiring a clock (PCICLK) cycle. High performance is realized during burst modes in which a transaction with contiguous memory locations requires that only one address cycle be conducted and subsequent data cycles are completed using auto-incremented addressing. Four types of address cycles can take place on the PCI bus; I/O, memory, configuration, and special. Address decoding is distributed (left up to each device on the PCI bus).
I/O and Memory Cycles
For I/O and memory cycles, a standard 32-bit address decode (AD31..0) for byte-level addressing is handled by the appropriate PCI device. For memory addressing, PCI devices decode the AD31..2 lines for dword-level addressing and check the AD1,0 lines for burst
(linear-incrementing) mode. In burst mode, subsequent data phases are conducted a dword at a time with addressing assumed to increment accordingly (four bytes at a time).
4-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
Configuration Cycles
Devices on the PCI bus must comply with PCI protocol that allows configuration of that device by software. In this system, configuration mechanism #1 (as described in the PCI Local Bus specification Rev. 2.3) is employed. This method uses two 32-bit registers for initiating a configuration cycle for accessing the configuration space of a PCI device. The configuration address register (CONFIG_ADDRESS) at 0CF8h holds a value that specifies the PCI bus, PCI device, and specific register to be accessed. The configuration data register (CONFIG_DATA) at
0CFCh contains the configuration data.
PCI Configuration Data Register
I/O Port 0CFCh, R/W, (8-, 16-, 32-bit access)
Bit
31
Function
Configuration Enable
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
30..24
Reserved—read/write 0s
23..16
Bus Number. Selects PCI bus
15..11
PCI Device Number. Selects PCI
device for access
10..8
Function Number. Selects function of
selected PCI device.
7..2
1,0
Register Index. Specifies config. reg.
Configuration Cycle Type ID.
00 = Type 0
01 = Type 1
PCI Configuration Address Register
I/O Port 0CF8h, R/W, (32-bit access only)
Bit
31..0
Function
Configuration Data.
Two types of configuration cycles are used. A Type 0 (zero) cycle is targeted to a device on the
PCI bus on which the cycle is running. A Type 1 cycle is targeted to a device on a downstream
PCI bus as identified by bus number bits <23..16>. With three or more PCI buses, a PCI bridge may convert a Type 1 to a Type 0 if it's destined for a device being serviced by that bridge or it may forward the Type 1 cycle unmodified if it is destined for a device being serviced by a downstream bridge. Figure 4-2 shows the configuration cycle format and how the loading of
0CF8h results in a Type 0 configuration cycle on the PCI bus. The Device Number (bits <15..11> determines which one of the AD31..11 lines is to be asserted high for the IDSEL signal, which acts as a “chip select” function for the PCI device to be configured. The function number (CF8h, bits <10..8>) is used to select a particular function within a PCI component.
Register 0CF8h
Results in:
AD31..0
(w/Type 00
Config. Cycle)
3
Reserved
2 2 1 1
Bus
Number
Device
Number
IDSEL (only one signal line asserted)
NOTES:
[1] Bits <1,0> : 00 = Type 0 Cycle, 01 = Type 1 cycle
Type 01 cycle only. Reserved on Type 00 cycle.
1 1 8 7
Function
Number
2 1 0 [1]
Register
Index
Function
Number
Register
Index
Figure 4-2. Configuration Cycle
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-3
System Support
Table 4-1 shows the standard configuration of device numbers and IDSEL connections for components and slots residing on a PCI 2.3 bus.
Table 4-1
PCI Component Configuration Access
PCI Component
82915G GMCH:
Host/DMI Bridge
Host/PCI Expr. Bridge
Integrated Graphics Cntlr.
PCI Express x16 graphics slot [1]
82801EB ICH6
PCI Bridge
LPC Bridge
IDE Controller
Serial ATA Controller
SMBus Controller
USB I/F #1
USB I/F #2
USB I/F #3
USB I/F #4
USB 2.0 Controller
AC97 Audio Controller
AC97 Modem Controller
Network Interface Controller
PCI Express port 1
PCI Express port 2
PCI 2.3 slot 1
PCI 2.3 slot 2
PCI 2.3 slot 3
PCI 2.3 slot 4
Notes Function #
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
0
7
2
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
0
0
NOTES:
[1] Not used in these systems.
[2] SFF, ST, MT, & CMT form factors only.
[3] CMT form factor with PCI expansion board.
Device #
4
9
30
0
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
31
29
29
10
11
28
28
2
0
8
8
8
8
0
64
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PCI Bus
#
IDSEL
Wired to:
--
0
0
0
32 --
--
AD20
AD25
AD27
AD29
4-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
Configuration
Space
Header
The register index (CF8h, bits <7..2>) identifies the 32-bit location within the configuration space of the PCI device to be accessed. All PCI devices can contain up to 256 bytes of configuration data (Figure 4-3), of which the first 64 bytes comprise the configuration space header.
Device-Specific Area
Min. Lat. Min. GNT Int. Pin
Reserved
Reserved
Int. Line
Ex pansion ROM Base Address
Subs ystem ID Subs ystem Vendor ID
Card Bus CIS Pointer
Base Address Registers
BIST Hdr. T ype
Class Code
Status
Device ID
Lat. Timer Line Size
Revision ID
Command
Vendor ID
10h
0Ch
08h
04h
00h
PCI Configuration Space Type 0
FCh
40h
3Ch
38h
34h
30h
2Ch
28h
31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0
Index
FCh
Device-Specific Area
Brid ge Control Int. Pin
Ex pansion ROM Base Address
Reserved
Int. Line
I/O Limit Upper 16 Bits I/O Base U pper 16 Bits
Prefetchable Limit U pper 32 Bits
Prefetchable Base U pper 32 Bits
Prefetch. Mem. Limit Prefetch. Mem. Base
Memor y Limit
Secondar y Status
2 nd
Lat.Tmr
Sub. Bus #
Memor y Base
I/O Limit
Sec. Bus #
I/O Base
Pri. Bus #
Base Address Registers
BIST Hdr. T ype
Class Code
Status
Device ID
Lat. Timer Line Size
Revision ID
Command
Vendor ID
10h
0Ch
08h
04h
00h
40h
3Ch
38h
34h
30h
2Ch
28h
24h
20h
1Ch
18h
PCI Configuration Space Type 1
Data required by PCI protocol Not required
Figure 4-3. PCI Configuration Space Mapping
PCI 2.3 Bus Master Arbitration
The PCI bus supports a bus master/target arbitration scheme. A bus master is a device that has been granted control of the bus for the purpose of initiating a transaction. A target is a device that is the recipient of a transaction. The Request (REQ), Grant (GNT), and FRAME signals are used by PCI bus masters for gaining access to the PCI bus. When a PCI device needs access to the PCI bus (and does not already own it), the PCI device asserts it's REQn signal to the PCI bus arbiter (a function of the system controller component). If the bus is available, the arbiter asserts the GNTn signal to the requesting device, which then asserts FRAME and conducts the address phase of the transaction with a target. If the PCI device already owns the bus, a request is not needed and the device can simply assert FRAME and conduct the transaction. Table 4-3 shows the grant and request signals assignments for the devices on the PCI bus.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-5
System Support
Table 4-3.
PCI Bus Mastering Devices
Device
PCI Connector Slot 1
PCI Connector Slot 2
PCI Connector Slot 3
PCI Connector Slot 4
REQ/GNT Line
REQ0/GNT0
REQ1/GNT1
REQ2/GNT2
REQ3/GNT3
Note
[1]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
[1]SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only.
[2] CMT form factor with PCI expansion board
PCI bus arbitration is based on a round-robin scheme that complies with the fairness algorithm specified by the PCI specification. The bus parking policy allows for the current PCI bus owner
(excepting the PCI/ISA bridge) to maintain ownership of the bus as long as no request is asserted by another agent. Note that most CPU-to-DRAM and AGP-to-DRAM accesses can occur concurrently with PCI traffic, therefore reducing the need for the Host/PCI bridge to compete for
PCI bus ownership.
4.2.2 PCI Express Bus Operation
The PCI Express bus is a high-performace extension of the legacy PCI bus specification. The PCI
Express bus uses the following layers:
■
■
■
■
Software/driver layer
Transaction protocol layer
Link layer
Physical layer
Software/Driver Layer
The PCI Express bus maintains software compatibility with PCI 2.3 and earlier versions so that there is no impact on existing operating systems and drivers. During system intialization, the PCI
Express bus uses the same methods of device discovery and resource allocation that legacy
PCI-based operating systems and drivers are designed to use. The use of PCI configuration space and the programmability of I/O devices are also used in the same way as for legacy PCI buses.
The software/driver layer provides read and write requests to the transaction layer for handling a data transfer.
Transaction Protocol Layer
The transaction protocol layer processes read and write requests from the software/driver layer and generates request packets for the link layer. Each packet includes an identifier allowing any required responcse packets to be directed to the originator.
PCI Express protocol supports the three legacy PCI address spaces (memory, I/O, configuration) as well as a new message space. The message space allows in-band processing of interrupts through use of the Message Signal Interrupt (MSI) introduced with the PCI 2.2 specification. The
MSI method eliminates the need for hard-wired sideband signals by incorporating those functions into packets.
4-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
Link Layer
The link layer provides data integrity by adding a sequence information prefix and a CRC suffix to the packet created by the transaction layer. Flow-control methods ensure that a packet will only be transferred if the receiving device is ready to accomodate it. A corrupted packet will be automatically re-sent.
Physical Layer
The PCI Express bus uses a point-to-point, high-speed TX/RX serial lane topology. that can be scalable as to the the end point’s requirements. One or more full-duplex lanes transfer data serially. Each lane consists of two differential pairs of signal paths (Figure 4-4), one for transmit, one for receive.
System Board PCI Express Card
Device A
TX
RX
Device B
Figure 4-4. PCI Express Bus Lane
Each byte is transferred using 8b/10b encoding. which embeds the clock signal with the data.
Operating at a 2.5 Gigabit transfer rate, a single lane can provide a data flow of 200 MBps. The bandwidth is increased if additional lanes are available for use. During the initialization process, two PCI Express devices will negotiate for the number of lanes available and the speed the link can operate at.
In a x1 (single lane) interface, all data bytes are transferred serially over the lane. In a multi-lane interface, data bytes are distributed across the lanes using a multiplex scheme as shown in Table
4-4:
4
5
2
3
6
7
Byte #
0
1
Table 4-4.
PCI Express Byte Transfer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 x1
Transfer
Lane #
0
1
2
3
2
3
0
1 x4
Transfer
Lane #
4
5
2
3
6
7
0
1 x8
Transfer
Lane #
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-7
System Support
For a PCI Express x16 transfer, a lane will be re-used every17th byte of a transfer. The mux-demux process provided by the physical layer is transparent to the other layers and to software/drivers.
The SFF, ST, MT MT, and CMT forma factors provide two PCI Express slots: a PCI Express x16
(16-lane) slot specifically designed for a graphics controller, and a general purpose PCI Express x1 (1-lane) slot.
4.2.3 Option ROM Mapping
During POST, the PCI bus is scanned for devices that contain their own specific firmware in
ROM. Such option ROM data, if detected, is loaded into system memory's DOS compatibility area (refer to the system memory map shown in chapter 3).
4.2.4 PCI Interrupts
Eight interrupt signals (INTA- thru INTH-) are available for use by PCI devices. These signals may be generated by on-board PCI devices or by devices installed in the PCI slots. For more information on interrupts including PCI interrupt mapping refer to the “System Resources” section 4.3.
4.2.5 PCI Power Management Support
This system complies with the PCI Power Management Interface Specification (rev 1.0). The
PCI Power Management Enable (PME-) signal is supported by the chipset and allows compliant
PCI peripherals to initiate the power management routine.
4-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
4.2.6 PCI Connectors
PCI 2.3 Connector
A1 A49 A52 A62
B2
B49
Figure 4-5. PCI 2.3 Bus Connector (32-Bit, 5.0-volt Type)
B52 B62
INTB-
INTD-
PRSNT1-
RSVD
PRSNT2-
GND
GND
RSVD
B Signal
-12 VDC
TCK
GND
TDO
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
GND
CLK
GND
REQ-
+5 VDC
AD31
AD29
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
03
04
05
06
Pin
01
02
19
20
21
15
16
17
18
A Signal
TRST-
+12 VDC
TMS
TDI
+5 VDC
INTA-
INTC-
+5 VDC
Reserved
+5 VDC
Reserved
GND
GND
+3.3 AUX
RST-
+5 VDC
GNT-
GND
PME-
AD30
+3.3 VDC
B Signal
GND
AD27
AD25
+3.3 VDC
C/BE3-
AD23
GND
AD21
AD19
+3.3 VDC
AD17
C/BE2-
GND
IRDY-
+3.3 VDC
DEVSEL-
GND
LOCK-
PERR-
+3.3 VDC
SERR-
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
Pin
22
23
40
41
42
36
37
38
39
A Signal
AD28
AD26
GND
AD24
IDSEL
+3.3 VDC
AD22
AD20
GND
AD18
AD16
+3.3 VDC
FRAME-
GND
TRDY-
GND
STOP-
+3.3 VDC
SDONE n
SBO-
GND
B Signal
+3.3 VDC
C/BE1-
AD14
GND
AD12
AD10
GND
Key
Key
AD08
AD07
+3.3 VDC
AD05
AD03
GND
AD01
+5 VDC
ACK64-
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Pin
43
44
57
58
59
60
61
62
A Signal
PAR
AD15
+3.3 VDC
AD13
AD11
GND
AD09
Key
Key
C/BE0-
+3.3 VDC
AD06
AD04
GND
AD02
AD00
+5 VDC
REQ64-
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-9
System Support
PCI Express Connectors
A1 A11 A12 A18 x1 Connector x16 Connector
B1 B11 B12
Figure 4-6. PCI Express Bus Connectors
A82
B82
4-10
PETp2
PETn2
GND
GND
PETp3
PETn3
PETn0
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp1
PETn1
GND
GND
B Signal
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
RSVD
GND
SMCLK
+5 VDC
GND
+3.3 VDC
JTAG1
3.3 Vaux
WAKE
RSVD
GND
PETp0
23
24
25
26
27
28
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
03
04
05
06
Pin
01
02
51
52
53
54
55
56
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
31
32
33
34
Pin
29
30
GND
GND
PERp2
PERn2
GND
GND
GND
PERp0
PERn0
GND
RSVD
GND
PERp1
PERn1
A Signal
PRSNT1#
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
GND
+5 VDC
JTAG2
JTAG4
JTAG5
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
PERST#
GND
REFCLK+
REFCLK-
PETn8
GND
GND
PETp9
PETn9
GND
GND
GND
PETp7
PETn7
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp8
GND
GND
PETp5
PETn5
GND
GND
PETp6
PETn6
B Signal
GND
RSVD
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp4
PETn4
PETn13
GND
GND
PETp14
PETn14
GND
GND
PETp15
PETn15
GND
PRSNT2#
RSVD
PETn11
GND
GND
PETp12
PETn12
GND
GND
PETp13
B Signal
GND
PETp10
PETn10
GND
GND
PETp11
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
79
80
81
82
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
Pin
57
58
GND
PERp8
PERn8
GND
GND
PERp9
PERp6
PERn6
GND
GND
PERp7
PERn7
GND
RSVD
PERp4
PERn4
GND
GND
PERp5
PERn5
GND
GND
A Signal
PERp3
PERn3
GND
RSVD
RSVD
GND
GND
PERp13
PERn13
GND
GND
PERp14
PERn14
GND
GND
PERp15
PERn15
GND
GND
PERp11
PERn11
GND
GND
PERp12
PERn12
GND
A Signal
PERn9
GND
GND
PERp10
PERn10
GND
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
This section describes the availability and basic control of major subsystems, otherwise known as resource allocation or simply “system resources.” System resources are provided on a priority basis through hardware interrupts and DMA requests and grants.
4.3.1 Interrupts
The microprocessor uses two types of hardware interrupts; maskable and nonmaskable. A maskable interrupt can be enabled or disabled within the microprocessor by the use of the STI and CLI instructions. A nonmaskable interrupt cannot be masked off within the microprocessor, although it may be inhibited by hardware or software means external to the microprocessor.
Maskable Interrupts
The maskable interrupt is a hardware-generated signal used by peripheral functions within the system to get the attention of the microprocessor. Peripheral functions produce a unique INTA-H
(PCI) or IRQ0-15 (ISA) signal that is routed to interrupt processing logic that asserts the interrupt (INTR-) input to the microprocessor. The microprocessor halts execution to determine the source of the interrupt and then services the peripheral as appropriate.
Most IRQs are routed through the I/O controller of the super I/O component, which provides the serializing function. A serialized interrupt stream is then routed to the ICH component.
Interrupts may be processed in one of two modes (selectable through the F10 Setup utility):
■
■
8259 mode
APIC mode
These modes are described in the following subsections.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-11
System Support
8259 Mode
The 8259 mode handles interrupts IRQ0-IRQ15 in the legacy (AT-system) method using
8259-equivalent logic. Table 4-7 lists the standard source configuration for maskable interrupts and their priorities in 8259 mode. If more than one interrupt is pending, the highest priority
(lowest number) is processed first.
Table 4-7.
Maskable Interrupt Priorities and Assignments
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
--
4
5
2
3
Priority Signal (Typical)
1 IRQ0 Interval timer 1, counter 0
IRQ1
IRQ8-
IRQ9
IRQ10
Keyboard
Real-time clock
Unused
PCI devices/slots
IRQ11
IRQ12
IRQ13
IRQ14
IRQ15
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
IRQ2
Audio codec
Mouse
Coprocessor (math)
Primary IDE controller
Sec. IDE I/F controller (not available on SATA units)
Serial port (COM2)
Serial port (COM1)
Network interface controller
Diskette drive controller
Parallel port (LPT1)
NOT AVAILABLE (Cascade from interrupt controller 2)
4-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
INTA-
INTB-
INTC-
INTD-
INTE-
INTF-
INTG-
INTH-
APIC Mode
The Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) mode provides enhanced interrupt processing with the following advantages:
■
■
■
Eliminates the processor's interrupt acknowledge cycle by using a separate (APIC) bus
Programmable interrupt priority
Additional interrupts (total of 24)
The APIC mode accommodates eight PCI interrupt signals (INTA-..INTH-) for use by PCI devices. The PCI interrupts are evenly distributed to minimize latency and wired as follows:
Wired to
PCI
Slot 1
INTA-
—
INTB-
—
—
INTC-
INTD-
—
PCI
Slot 2
INTD-
—
INTA-
—
—
INTB-
INTC-
—
PCI
Slot 3
INTB-
—
INTC-
—
—
INTD-
INTA-
—
PCI
Slot 4
INTD-
—
INTA-
—
—
INTB-
INTC-
—
NOTES:
[1] Connection internal to the ICH. Will be reported by BIOS as using INTA but is NOT shared with other functions using INTA.
MT, CMT form factors only.
SFF, ST, MT, CMT form factors only.
The PCI interrupts can be configured by PCI Configuration Registers 60h..63h to share the standard ISA interrupts (IRQn).
✎
The APIC mode is supported by the Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. Systems running the Windows 95 or 98 operating system will need to run in 8259 mode.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-13
System Support
Maskable Interrupt processing is controlled and monitored through standard AT-type
I/O-mapped registers. These registers are listed in Table 4-8.
Table 4-8.
Maskable Interrupt Control Registers
I/O Port Register
020h Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 1
021h
0A0h
0A1h
Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 1
Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 2
Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 2
The initialization and operation of the interrupt control registers follows standard AT-type protocol.
Non-Maskable Interrupts
Non-maskable interrupts cannot be masked (inhibited) within the microprocessor itself but may be maskable by software using logic external to the microprocessor. There are two non-maskable interrupt signals: the NMI- and the SMI-. These signals have service priority over all maskable interrupts, with the SMI- having top priority over all interrupts including the NMI-.
NMI- Generation
The Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI-) signal can be generated by one of the following actions:
■
■
Parity errors detected on a PCI bus (activating SERR- or PERR-).
Microprocessor internal error (activating IERRA or IERRB)
The SERR- and PERR- signals are routed through the ICH6 component, which in turn activates the NMI to the microprocessor.
4-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
The NMI Status Register at I/O port 061h contains NMI source and status data as follows:
NMI Status Register 61h
5
4
3
1
0
Bit
7
6
2
Function
NMI Status:
0 = No NMI from system board parity error.
1 = NMI requested, read only
IOCHK- NMI:
0 = No NMI from IOCHK-
1 = IOCHK- is active (low), NMI requested, read only
Interval Timer 1, Counter 2 (Speaker) Status
Refresh Indicator (toggles with every refresh)
IOCHK- NMI Enable/Disable:
0 = NMI from IOCHK- enabled
1 = NMI from IOCHK- disabled and cleared (R/W)
System Board Parity Error (PERR/SERR) NMI Enable:
0 = Parity error NMI enabled
1 = Parity error NMI disabled and cleared (R/W)
Speaker Data (R/W)
Inteval Timer 1, Counter 2 Gate Signal (R/W)
0 = Counter 2 disabled
1 = Counter 2 enabled
Functions not related to NMI activity
After the active NMI has been processed, status bits <7> or <6> are cleared by pulsing bits <2> or <3> respectively.
The NMI Enable Register (070h, <7>) is used to enable/disable the NMI signal. Writing 80h to this register masks generation of the NMI-. Note that the lower six bits of register at I/O port 70h affect RTC operation and should be considered when changing NMI- generation status.
SMI- Generation
The SMI- (System Management Interrupt) is typically used for power management functions.
When power management is enabled, inactivity timers are monitored. When a timer times out,
SMI- is asserted and invokes the microprocessor's SMI handler. The SMI- handler works with the
APM BIOS to service the SMI- according to the cause of the timeout.
Although the SMI- is primarily used for power management the interrupt is also employed for the QuickLock/QuickBlank functions as well.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-15
System Support
4.3.2 Direct Memory Access
Direct Memory Access (DMA) is a method by which a device accesses system memory without involving the microprocessor. Although the DMA method has been traditionally used to transfer blocks of data to or from an ISA I/O device, PCI devices may also use DMA operation as well.
The DMA method reduces the amount of CPU interactions with memory, freeing the CPU for other processing tasks.
✎
This section describes DMA in general. For detailed information regarding DMA operation, refer to the data manual for the Intel 82801 I/O Controller Hub.
The 82801 ICH6 component includes the equivalent of two 8237 DMA controllers cascaded together to provide eight DMA channels, each (excepting channel 4) configurable to a specific device. Table 4-9 lists the default configuration of the DMA channels.
Table 4-9.
Default DMA Channel Assignments
Device ID DMA Channel
Controller 1 (byte transfers)
0
1
2
3
Controller 2 (word transfers)
4
5
6
7
Spare
Audio subsystem
Diskette drive
Parallel port
Cascade for controller 1
Spare
Spare
Spare
All channels in DMA controller 1 operate at a higher priority than those in controller 2. Note that channel 4 is not available for use other than its cascading function for controller 1. The DMA controller 2 can transfer words only on an even address boundary. The DMA controller and page register define a 24-bit address that allows data transfers within the address space of the CPU.
In addition to device configuration, each channel can be configured (through PCI Configuration
Registers) for one of two modes of operation:
■
■
LPC DMA
PC/PCI DMA
The LPC DMA mode uses the LPC bus to communicate DMA channel control and is implemented for devices using DMA through the LPC47B397 I/O controller such as the diskette drive controller.
The PC/PCI DMA mode uses the REQ#/GNT# signals to communicate DMA channel control and is used by PCI expansion devices.
The DMA logic is accessed through two types of I/O mapped registers; page registers and controller registers.
4-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
DMA Page Registers
The DMA page register contains the eight most significant bits of the 24-bit address and works in conjunction with the DMA controllers to define the complete (24-bit) address for the DMA channels. Table 4-10 lists the page register port addresses.
Table 4-10.
DMA Page Register Addresses
DMA Channel
Controller 1 (byte transfers)
Ch 0
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Controller 2 (word transfers)
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Refresh
Page Register I/O Port
087h
083h
081h
082h n/a
08Bh
089h
08Ah
08Fh [see note]
NOTE:
The DMA memory page register for the refresh channel must be programmed with 00h for proper operation.
The memory address is derived as follows:
24-Bit Address—Controller 1 (Byte Transfers)
8-Bit Page Register 8-Bit DMA Controller
A23..A16
A15..A00
24-Bit Address—Controller 2 (Word Transfers)
8-Bit Page Register
A23..A17
16-Bit DMA Controller
A16..A01, (A00 = 0)
Note that address line A16 from the DMA memory page register is disabled when DMA controller 2 is selected. Address line A00 is not connected to DMA controller 2 and is always 0 when word-length transfers are selected.
By not connecting A00, the following applies:
■ The size of the the block of data that can be moved or addressed is measured in 16-bits
(words) rather than 8-bits (bytes).
■ The words must always be addressed on an even boundary.
DMA controller 1 can move up to 64 Kbytes of data per DMA transfer. DMA controller 2 can move up to 64 Kwords (128 Kbytes) of data per DMA transfer. Word DMA operations are only possible between 16-bit memory and 16-bit peripherals.
The RAM refresh is designed to perform a memory read cycle on each of the 512 row addresses in the DRAM memory space. Refresh operations are used to refresh memory on the 32-bit memory bus and the ISA bus. The refresh address is provided on lines SA00 through SA08.
Address lines LA23..17, SA18,19 are driven low.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-17
System Support
The remaining address lines are in an undefined state during the refresh cycle. The refresh operations are driven by a 69.799-KHz clock generated by Interval Timer 1, Counter 1. The refresh rate is 128 refresh cycles in 2.038 ms.
DMA Controller Registers
Table 4-11 lists the DMA Controller Registers and their I/O port addresses. Note that there is a set of registers for each DMA controller.
Status
Command
Mode
Write Single Mask Bit
Write All Mask Bits
Software DRQx Request
Base and Current Address—Ch 0
Current Address—Ch 0
Base and Current Word Count—Ch 0
Current Word Count—Ch 0
Base and Current Address—Ch 1
Current Address—Ch 1
Base and Current Word Count—Ch 1
Current Word Count—Ch 1
Base and Current Address—Ch 2
Current Address—Ch 2
Base and Current Word Count—Ch 2
Current Word Count—Ch 2
Base and Current Address—Ch 3
Current Address—Ch 3
Base and Current Word Count—Ch 3
Current Word Count—Ch 3
Temporary (Command)
Reset Pointer Flip-Flop (Command)
Master Reset (Command)
Reset Mask Register (Command)
Table 4-11.
DMA Controller Registers
004h
005h
005h
006h
006h
007h
007h
00Dh
00Ch
00Dh
00Eh
000h
001h
001h
002h
002h
003h
003h
004h
008h
008h
00Bh
00Ah
00Fh
009h
000h
0C8h
0CAh
0CAh
0CCh
0CCh
0CEh
0CEh
0DAh
0D8h
0DAh
0DCh
0C0h
0C2h
0C2h
0C4h
0C4h
0C6h
0C6h
0C8h
0D0h
0D0h
0D6h
0D4h
0DEh
0D2h
0C0h
R
R
R
W
R
W
R
W
W
W
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
W
W
W
W
R
W
W
4-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
4.4 Real-Time Clock and Configuration Memory
The Real-time clock (RTC) and configuration memory (also referred to as “CMOS”) functions are provided by the 82801 component and is MC146818-compatible. As shown in the following figure, the 82801 ICH6 component provides 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM divided into two
128-byte configuration memory areas. The RTC uses the first 14 bytes (00-0Dh) of the standard memory area. All locations of the standard memory area (00-7Fh) can be directly accessed using conventional OUT and IN assembly language instructions through I/O ports 70h/71h, although the suggested method is to use the INT15 AX=E823h BIOS call.
0Dh
0Ch
0Bh
0Ah
09h
08h
07h
06h
05h
04h
03h
02h
01h
00h
Register D
Register C
Register B
Register A
Year
Month
Date of Month
Day of Week
Hours (Alarm)
Hours (Timer)
Minutes (Alarm)
Minutes (Timer)
Seconds (Alarm)
Seconds (Timer)
82801
Extended Config.
Memory Area
(128 bytes)
Standard Config.
Memory Area
(114 bytes)
RTC Area
(14 bytes)
FFh
80h
7Fh
0Eh
0Dh
00h
CMOS
Figure 4 11. Configuration Memory Map
A lithium 3-VDC battery is used for maintaining the RTC and configuration memory while the system is powered down. During system operation a wire-Ored circuit allows the RTC and configuration memory to draw power from the power supply. The battery is located in a battery holder on the system board and has a life expectancy of four to eight years. When the battery has expired it is replaced with a Renata CR2032 or equivalent 3-VDC lithium battery.
4.4.1 Clearing CMOS
The contents of configuration memory (including the Power-On Password) can be cleared by the following procedure:
1. Turn off the unit.
2. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and/or system unit.
3. Remove the chassis hood (cover) and insure that no LEDs on the system board are illuminated.
4. On the system board, press and hold the CMOS clear button for at least 5 seconds.
5. Replace the chassis hood (cover).
6. Reconnect the AC power cord to the outlet and/or system unit.
7. Turn the unit on.
To clear only the Power-On Password refer to section 4.5.1.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-19
System Support
4.4.2 CMOS Archive and Restore
During the boot sequence the BIOS saves a copy of NVRAM (CMOS contents, password(s) and other system variables) in a portion of the flash ROM. Should the system become un-usable, the last good copy of NVRAM data can be restored with the Power Button Override function. This function is invoked with the following procedure:
1. With the unit powered down, press and release the power button.
2. Immediately after releasing the power button in step 1, press and hold the power button until the unit powers down. This action will be recorded as a Power Button Override event.
With the next startup sequence the BIOS will detect the occurrence of the Power Button Override event and will load the backup copy of NVRAM from the ROM to the CMOS.
✎
The Power Button Override feature does not allow quick cycling of the system (turning on then off). If the power cord is disconnected during the POST routine, the splash screen image may become corrupted, requiring a re-flashing of the ROM (refer to chapter 8, BIOS ROM).
4-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
4.4.3 Standard CMOS Locations
Table 4-12 describes standard configuration memory locations 0Ah-3Fh. These locations are accessible through using OUT/IN assembly language instructions using port 70/71h or BIOS function INT15, AX=E823h.
Table 4-12.
Configuration Memory (CMOS) Map
13h
14h
15h
16h
17h
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
Location Function
00-0Dh
0Eh
Real-time clock
Diagnostic status
0Fh
10h
11h
12h
System reset code
Diskette drive type
Reserved
Hard drive type
Security functions
Equipment installed
Base memory size, low byte/KB
Base memory size, high byte/KB
Extended memory, low byte/KB
Extended memory, high byte/KB
Hard drive 1, primary controller
Hard drive 2, primary controller
Hard drive 1, secondary controller
Hard drive 2, secondary controller
Enhanced hard drive support
Reserved
Power management functions
Location
24h
25h
26h
27h
28h
29h
2Ah
2Bh
2Ch
2Dh
2Eh-2Fh
30h-31h
32h
33h
34h
35h
36h
37h-3Fh
40-FFh
Function
System board ID
System architecture data
Auxiliary peripheral configuration
Speed control external drive
Expanded/base mem. size, IRQ12
Miscellaneous configuration
Hard drive timeout
System inactivity timeout
Monitor timeout, Num Lock Cntrl
Additional flags
Checksum of locations 10h-2Dh
Total extended memory tested
Century
Miscellaneous flags set by BIOS
International language
APM status flags
ECC POST test single bit
Power-on password
Feature Control/Status
NOTES:
Assume unmarked gaps are reserved.
Higher locations (>3Fh) contain information that should be accessed using the INT15, AX=E845h
BIOS function (refer to Chapter 8 for BIOS function descriptions).
This section describes functions having to do with security, power management, temperature, and overall status. These functions are handled by hardware and firmware (BIOS) and generally configured through the Setup utility.
4.5.1 Security Functions
These systems include various features that provide different levels of security. Note that this subsection describes only the hardware functionality (including that supported by Setup) and does not describe security features that may be provided by the operating system and application software.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-21
System Support
Power-On / Setup Password
These systems include a power-on and setup passwords, which may be enabled or disabled
(cleared) through a jumper on the system board. The jumper controls a GPIO input to the 82801
ICH6 that is checked during POST. The password is stored in configuration memory (CMOS) and if enabled and then forgotten by the user will require that either the password be cleared
(preferable solution and described below) or the entire CMOS be cleared (refer to section 4.4.1).
To clear the password, use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and/or system unit.
2. Remove the cover (hood) as described in the appropriate User Guide or Maintainance And
Service Reference Guide. Insure that all system board LEDs are off (not illuminated).
3. Locate the password clear jumper (header is labeled E49 on these systems) and move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 and place on (just) pin 2 (for safekeeping).
4. Replace the cover.
5. Re-connect the AC power cord to the AC outlet and/or system unit.
6. Turn on the system. The POST routine will clear and disable the password.
7. To re-enable the password feature, repeat steps 1-6, replacing the jumper on pins 1 and 2 of header E49.
Setup Password
The Setup utility may be configured to be always changeable or changeable only by entering a password. Refer to the previous procedure (Power On / Setup Password) for clearing the Setup password.
Cable Lock Provision
These systems include a chassis cutout (on the rear panel) for the attachment of a cable lock mechanism.
I/O Interface Security
The serial, parallel, USB, and diskette interfaces may be disabled individually through the Setup utility to guard against unauthorized access to a system. In addition, the ability to write to or boot from a removable media drive (such as the diskette drive) may be enabled through the Setup utility. The disabling of the serial, parallel, and diskette interfaces are a function of the
LPC47B397 I/O controller. The USB ports are controlled through the 82801.
Chassis Security
Some systems feature Smart Cover (hood) Sensor and Smart Cover (hood) Lock mechanisms to inhibit unauthorized tampering of the system unit.
Smart Cover Sensor
Some systems include a plunger switch that, when the cover (hood) is removed, closes and grounds an input of the 82801 component. The battery-backed logic will record this “intrusion” event by setting a specific bit. This bit will remain set (even if the cover is replaced) until the system is powered up and the user completes the boot sequence successfully, at which time the bit will be cleared. Through Setup, the user can set this function to be used by Alert-On-LAN and or one of three levels of support for a “cover removed” condition:
4-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
Level 0—Cover removal indication is essentially disabled at this level. During POST, status bit is cleared and no other action is taken by BIOS.
Level 1—During POST the message “The computer's cover has been removed since the last system start up” is displayed and time stamp in CMOS is updated.
Level 2—During POST the “The computer's cover has been removed since the last system start up” message is displayed, time stamp in CMOS is updated, and the user is prompted for the administrator password. (A Setup password must be enabled in order to see this option).
Smart Cover Lock (Optional)
Some systems support an optional solenoid-operated locking bar that, when activated, prevents the cover (hood) from being removed. The GPIO ports 44 and 45 of the LPC47B397 I/O controller provide the lock and unlock signals to the solenoid. A locked hood may be bypassed by removing special screws that hold the locking mechanism in place. The special screws are removed with the Smart Cover Lock Failsafe Key.
4.5.2 Power Management
This system provides baseline hardware support of ACPI- and APM-compliant firmware and software. Key power-consuming components (processor, chipset, I/O controller, and fan) can be placed into a reduced power mode either automatically or by user control. The system can then be brought back up (“wake-up”) by events defined by the ACPI specification. The ACPI wake-up events supported by this system are listed as follows:
ACPI Wake-Up Event
Power Button
RTC Alarm
Wake On LAN (w/NIC)
PME
Serial Port Ring
USB
Keyboard
Mouse
System Wakes From
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend only
Suspend only
Suspend only
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-23
System Support
4.5.3 System Status
These systems provide a visual indication of system boot and ROM flash status through the keyboard LEDs and operational status using bi-colored power and hard drive activity LEDs as indicated in Tables 4-13 and 4-14 respectively.
✎
The LED indications listed in Table 4-13 are valid only for PS/2-type keyboards. A USB keyboard will not provide LED status for the listed events, although audible (beep) indications will occur.
Table 4-13.
PS/2 Keyboard System Boot/ROM Flash Status LED Indications
Event
System memory failure [1]
Graphics controller failure [2]
System failure prior to graphics cntlr. initialization [3]
ROMPAQ diskette not present, faulty, or drive prob.
Password prompt
Invalid ROM detected—flash failed
Keyboard locked in network mode
Successful boot block ROM flash
NUM Lock
LED
Blinking
Off
Off
On
Off
Blinking [4]
Blinking [5]
On [6]
CAPs Lock
LED
Off
Blinking
Off
Off
On
Blinking [4]
Blinking [5]
On [6]
NOTES:
[1]Accompanied by 1 short, 2 long audio beeps
[2]Accompanied by 1 long, 2 short audio beeps
[3]Accompanied by 2 long, 1 short audio beeps
[4]All LEDs will blink in sync twice, accompanied by 1 long and three short audio beeps
[5]LEDs will blink in sequence (NUM Lock, then CAPs Lock, then Scroll Lock)
[6]Accompanied by rising audio tone.
Badkdd
Table 4-14 lists the audible and visible indications provided by system status conditions. .
Scroll Lock
LED
Off
Off
Blinking
Off
Off
Blinking [4]
Blinking [5]
On [6]
System Status
S0: System on (normal operation)
S1: Suspend
S3: Suspend to RAM
S4: Suspend to disk
S5: Soft off
Processor thermal shutdown
Processor not seated / installed
Power supply overload failure
Memory error (pre-video)
Video error
Table 4-14.
System Operational Status LED Indications
PowerLED Beeps [2]
PCA failure detected by BIOS (pre-video)
Invalid ROM checksum error
Boot failure (after power on)
Bad option card
Steady green
Blinks green @ .5 Hz
Blinks green @ .5 Hz
Off – clear
Off – clear
Blinks red 2 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 3 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 4 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 5 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 6 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 7 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 8 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 9 times @ I Hz [1]
Blinks red 10 times @ I Hz [1]
None
None
None
None
None
2 [2]
3 [2]
4 [2]
5 [2]
6 [2]
7 [2]
8 [2]
9 [2]
10 [2]
Action Required none none none none none
Check air flow, fans, heatsink
Check processor presence/seating
Check voltage selector, devices, sys. bd
Check DIMMs, system board
Check graphics card or system board
Replace system board
Reflash BIOS ROM
Check power supply, processor, sys. bd
Replace option card
[1] Repeated after 2 second pause.
[2] Beeps are produced by the on-board piezo speaker, NOT the chassis speaker.
[3] Beeps are repeated for 5 cycles, after which only blinking LED indication continues.
4-24 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
4.5.4 Thermal Sensing and Cooling
All systems feature a variable-speed fan mounted as part of the processor heatsink assembly. All systems also provide or support an auxiliary chassis fan. All fans are controlled through temperature sensing logic on the system board and/or in the power supply. There are some electrical differences between form factors and between some models, although the overall functionally is the same. Typical cooling conditions include the following:
1. Normal—Low fan speed.
2. Hot processor—ASIC directs Speed Control logic to increase speed of fan(s).
3. Hot power supply—Power supply increases speed of fan(s).
4. Sleep state—Fan(s) turned off. Hot processor or power supply will result in starting fan(s).
The RPM (speed) of all fans is the result of the temperature of the CPU as sensed by speed control circuitry. The fans are controlled to run at the slowest (quietest) speed that will maintain proper cooling.
✎
Units using chassis and CPU fans must have both fans connected to their corresponding headers to ensure proper cooling of the system.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-25
System Support
4.6 Register Map and Miscellaneous Functions
This section contains the system I/O map and information on general-purpose functions of the
ICH6 and I/O controller.
4.6.1 System I/O Map
Table 4-15 lists the fixed addresses of the input/output (I/O) ports.
I/O Port
0000..001Fh
0020..002Dh
002E, 002Fh
0030..003Dh
0040..0042h
004E, 004Fh
0050..0052h
0060..0067h
0070..0077h
0080..0091h
0092h
0093..009Fh
00A0..00B1h
00B2h, 00B3h
00B4..00BDh
Table 4-15
System I/O Map
Function
DMA Controller 1
Interrupt Controller 1
Index, Data Ports to LPC47B397 I/O Controller (primary)
Interrupt Controller
Timer 1
Index, Data Ports to LPC47B397 I/O Controller (secondary)
Timer / Counter
Microcontroller, NMI Controller (alternating addresses)
RTC Controller
DMA Controller
Port A, Fast A20/Reset Generator
DMA Controller
Interrupt Controller 2
APM Control/Status Ports
Interrupt Controller
00F0h
0170..0177h
01F0..01F7h
0278..027Fh
02E8..02EFh
02F8..02FFh
0370..0377h
0376h
0378..037Fh
03B0..03DFh
03BC..03BEh
03E8..03EFh
03F0..03F5h
03F6h
03F8..03FFh
04D0, 04D1h
0678..067Fh
0778..077Fh
07BC..07BEh
0CF8h
0CF9h
0CFCh
Coprocessor error register
IDE Controller 2 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for primary drive)
IDE Controller 1 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for secondary drive)
Parallel Port (LPT2)
Serial Port (COM4)
Serial Port (COM2)
Diskette Drive Controller Secondary Address
IDE Controller 2 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for primary drive)
Parallel Port (LPT1)
Graphics Controller
Parallel Port (LPT3)
Serial Port (COM3)
Diskette Drive Controller Primary Addresses
IDE Controller 1 (active only if standard I/O space is enabled for sec. drive)
Serial Port (COM1)
Interrupt Controller
Parallel Port (LPT2)
Parallel Port (LPT1)
Parallel Port (LPT3)
PCI Configuration Address (dword access only )
Reset Control Register
PCI Configuration Data (byte, word, or dword access)
NOTE:
Assume unmarked gaps are unused, reserved, or used by functions that employ variable I/O address mapping. Some ranges may include reserved addresses.
4-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
System Support
4.6.2 LPC47B397 I/O Controller Functions
The LPC47B397 I/O controller contains various functions such as the keyboard/mouse interfaces, diskette interface, serial interfaces, and parallel interface. While the control of these interfaces uses standard AT-type I/O addressing (as described in chapter 5) the configuration of these functions uses indexed ports unique to the LPC47B397. In these systems, hardware strapping selects I/O addresses 02Eh and 02Fh at reset as the Index/Data ports for accessing the logical devices within the LPC47B397. Table 4-16 lists the PnP standard control registers for the
LPC47B397.
Index
02h
03h
07h
20h
21h
22h
23h
24h
25h
26h
27h
28-2Fh
Table 4-16.
LPC47B397 I/O Controller Control Registers
Function
Configuration Control
Reserved
Logical Device (Interface) Select:
00h = Diskette Drive I/F
01h = Reserved
02h = Reserved
03h = Parallel I/F
04h = Serial I/F (UART 1/Port A)
05h = Serial I/F (UART 2/Port B)
06h = Reserved
07h = Keyboard I/F
08h = Reserved
09h = Reserved
0Ah = Runtime Registers (GPIO Config.)
0Bh = SMBus Configuration
Super I/O ID Register (SID)
Revision
Logical Device Power Control
Logical Device Power Management
PLL / Oscillator Control
Reserved
Configuration Address (Low Byte)
Configuration Address (High Byte)
Reserved
Reset Value
00h
00h
56h
--
00h
00h
04h
NOTE:
For a detailed description of registers refer to appropriate SMC documentation.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 4-27
System Support
The configuration registers are accessed through I/O registers 2Eh (index) and 2Fh (data) after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h to I/O port 2Eh. The desired interface
(logical device) is initiated by firmware selecting logical device number of the 47B347 using the following sequence:
1. Write 07h to I/O register 2Eh.
2. Write value of logical device to I/O register 2Fh.
3. Write 30h to I/O register 2Eh.
4. Write 01h to I/O register 2Fh (this activates the interface).
Writing AAh to 2Eh deactivates the configuration phase.
The systems covered in this guide utilize the following specialized functions built into the LPC
47B397 I/O Controller:
■ Power/Hard drive LED control—The I/O controller provides color and blink control for the front panel LEDs used for indicating system events (refer to Table 4-14).
■ Intruder sensing—The battery-backed D-latch logic internal to the LPC47B397 is connected to the hood sensor switch to record hood (cover) removal.
■ Hood lock/unlock—Supported on SFF, ST, and CMT form factors, logic internal to the
LPC47B397 controls the lock bar mechanism.
■ I/O security—The parallel, serial, and diskette interfaces may be disabled individually by software and the LPC47B397's disabling register locked. If the disabling register is locked, a system reset through a cold boot is required to gain access to the disabling (Device Disable) register.
■ Processor present/speed detection—One of the battery-back general-purpose inputs (GPI26) of the LPC47B397 detects if the processor has been removed. The occurrence of this event is passed to the ICH6 that will, during the next boot sequence, initiate the speed selection routine for the processor.
■ Legacy/ACPI power button mode control—The LPC47B397 receives the pulse signal from the system's power button and produces the PS On signal according to the mode (legacy or
ACPI) selected. Refer to chapter 7 for more information regarding power management.
4-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
5
Input/Output Interfaces
5.1 Introduction
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
This chapter describes the standard (i.e., system board) interfaces that provide input and output
(I/O) porting of data and specifically discusses interfaces that are controlled through I/O-mapped registers. The following I/O interfaces are covered in this chapter:
PATA/SATA interface (5.2), page 5-1
Diskette drive interface (5.3), page 5-7
Serial interfaces (5.4), page 5-12
Parallel interface (5.5), page 5-14
Keyboard/pointing device interface (5.6), page 5-18
Universal serial bus interface (5.7), page 5-25
Audio subsystem (5.8), page 5-29
Network interface controller (5.9), page 5-36
These systems provide both legacy EIDE (i.e., parallel ATA or PATA) and serial ATA (SATA) interfaces. All systems are shipped configured with SATA hard drives.
One 40-pin IDE connector is included on the system board. The controller can be configured for the following modes of operation:
■ Programmed I/O (PIO) mode—CPU controls drive transactions through standard I/O mapped registers of the IDE drive.
■ 8237 DMA mode—CPU offloads drive transactions using DMA protocol with transfer rates up to 16 MB/s.
■ Ultra ATA/100 mode—Preferred bus mastering source-synchronous protocol providing transfer rates of 100 MB/s.
IDE Programming
The IDE interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through
I/O-mapped registers at runtime. Non-DOS (non-Windows) operating systems may require using
Setup (F10) for drive configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-1
Input/Output Interfaces
IDE Configuration Registers
The IDE controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability. The PCI configuration registers for the IDE controller function (PCI device #31, function #1) are listed in
Table 5-1.
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Dh
0Eh
PCI Conf.
Address Register
00-01h Vender ID
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming
Sub-Class
Base Class Code
Master Latency Timer
Header Type
Table 5-1.
EIDE PCI Configuration Registers (82801)
80h
01h
01h
00h
00h
Reset
Value
PCI Conf.
Addr.
Register
8086h 0F..1Fh
Reserved
[1] 20-23h
0000h 2C, 2Dh
0280h 2E, 2Fh
00h 30..3Fh
BMIDE Base Address
Subsystem Vender ID
Subsystem ID
Reserved
40-43h
44h
48h
4A-4Bh
54h
Pri./Sec. IDE Timing
Slave IDE Timing
Sync. DMA Control
Sync. DMA Timing
EIDE I/O Config.Register
NOTE:
[1] ICH6 = 244Bh; ICH6 = 24CBh
0’s
00h
00h
0000h
00h
Reset
Value
0’s
1
0000h
0000h
0’s
5-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
IDE Bus Master Control Registers
The IDE interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table 5-2.
These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I/O space set by software and indicated by PCI configuration register 20h in the previous table.
Table 5-2.
IDE Bus Master Control Registers
04h
08h
0Ah
0Ch
I/O
Address
Offset
Size
(Bytes)
00h
02h
1
1
Register
Bus Master IDE Command (Primary)
Bus Master IDE Status (Primary)
4
1
2
4
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Pri.)
Bus Master IDE Command (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Status (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Sec.)
Default
Value
00h
00h
0000 0000h
00h
00h
0000 0000h
NOTE:
Unspecified gaps are reserved, will return indeterminate data, and should not be written to.
IDE (PATA) Connector
These systems provide a standard 40-pin connector for a primary IDE device and in most factory configurations connects to a optical drive (CD or DVD). Some signals are re-defined for
UATA/33 and higher modes. Device power is supplied through a separate connector.
Figure 5-1. 40-Pin IDE (PATA) Connector.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-3
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-3.
40-Pin IDE (PATA) Connector Pinout
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
19
20
6
7
4
5
2
3
Pin Signal Description
1 RESETReset
GND
DD7
Ground
Data Bit <7>
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
Data Bit <8>
Data Bit <6>
Data Bit <9>
Data Bit <5>
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
GND
--
Data Bit <10>
Data Bit <4>
Data Bit <11>
Data Bit <3>
Data Bit <12>
Data Bit <2>
Data Bit <13>
Data Bit <1>
Data Bit <14>
Data Bit <0>
Data Bit <15>
Ground
Key
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
36
37
38
39
40
24
25
26
27
Pin Signal
21 DRQ
22
23
GND
IOW-
GND
IOR-
GND
IORDY
CSEL
DAK-
GND
IRQn
IO16-
DA1
DSKPDIAG
DA0
DA2
CS0-
CS1-
HDACTIVE-
GND
Description
DMA Request
Ground
I/O Write [1]
Ground
I/O Read [2]
Ground
I/O Channel Ready [3]
Cable Select
DMA Acknowledge
Ground
Interrupt Request [4]
16-bit I/O
Address 1
Pass Diagnostics
Address 0
Address 2
Chip Select
Chip Select
Drive Active (front panel LED) [5]
Ground
NOTES:
[1] On UATA/33 and higher modes, re-defined as STOP.
[2] On UATA/33 and higher mode reads, re-defined as DMARDY-.
On UATA/33 and higher mode writes, re-defined as STROBE.
[3] On UATA/33 and higher mode reads, re-defined as STROBE-.
On UATA/33 and higher mode writes, re-defined as DMARDY-.
[4] Primary connector wired to IRQ14, secondary connector wired to IRQ15.
[5] Pin 39 is used for spindle sync and drive activity (becomes SPSYNC/DACT-) when synchronous drives are connected.
5-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
SATA Interfaces
These systems provide one, two, or four serial ATA (SATA) interfaces that can provide certain advantages over legacy EIDE (PATA) interface including:
■
■
Higher transfer rates: up to 1.5 Gb/s (150 MB/s)
Reduced wiring (smaller cable assemblies)
The SATA interface duplicates most of the functionality of the EIDE interface through a register interface that is equivalent to that of the legacy IDE host adapter.
SATA Programming
The SATA interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through
I/O-mapped registers at runtime. Non-DOS (non-Windows) operating systems may require using
Setup (F10) for drive configuration.
SATA Configuration Registers
The SATA controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability. The PCI configuration registers for the SATA controller function (PCI device #31, function #2) are listed in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4.
SATA PCI Configuration Registers (82801, Device 31/Function 2)
PCI Conf.
Addr.
00-01h
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Dh
0Eh
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming
Sub-Class
Base Class Code
Master Latency Timer
Header Type
Reset
Value
PCI Conf.
Addr.
8086h 0F..1Fh
24D1h 10-17h
0000h 18-1Fh
02B0h 20-23h
00h
8Ah
2C, 2Dh
2E, 2Fh
01h
01h
00h
00h
34h
3Ch
3Dh
40-57h
Register
Reserved
Pri. Cmd, Cntrl.
Addrs.
Sec. Cmd, Cntrl.
Addrs.
BMstr Base Address
Reset
Value
0’s
1 (both)
1 (both)
1
Subsystem Vender ID 0000h
Subsystem ID 0000h
Capabilities pointer
Interrupt Line
Interrupt Pin
Timing, Control
80h
00h
01h
All 0’s
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-5
Input/Output Interfaces
SATA Bus Master Control Registers
The SATA interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table
5-5. These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I/O space set by software and indicated by PCI configuration register 20h in the previous table. As indicated, these registers are virtually a copy of those used by EIDE operations discussed in the EIDE section.
I/O Addr.
Offset
00h
02h
04h
08h
0Ah
0Ch
Table 5-5.
IDE Bus Master Control Registers
Size
(Bytes) Register
1 Bus Master IDE Command (Primary)
1
2
1
4
4
Bus Master IDE Status (Primary)
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Primary)
Bus Master IDE Command (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Status (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Secondary
SATA Connector
The 7-pin SATA connector is shown in the figure below.
Pin 1 Pin 7
Default Value
00h
00h
0000 0000h
00h
00h
0000 0000h
4
5
2
3
Pin
1
A
Figure 5-2. 7-Pin SATA Connector (on system board).
Table 5-6.
7-Pin SATA Connector Pinout
Description
Ground
TX positive
TX negative
Ground
RX negative
B
--
7
A
Pin
6
Description
RX positive
Ground
Holding clip
Holding clip
--
B
5-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
The diskette drive interface in these systems support one diskette drive connected to a standard
34-pin diskette drive connector. Selected models come standard with a 3.5-inch 1.44-MB diskette drive installed as drive A.
■
■
■
The diskette drive interface function is integrated into the LPC47B397 super I/O component. The internal logic of the I/O controller is software-compatible with standard 82077-type logic. The diskette drive controller has three operational phases in the following order:
Command phase—The controller receives the command from the system.
Execution phase—The controller carries out the command.
Results phase—Status and results data is read back from the controller to the system.
The Command phase consists of several bytes written in series from the CPU to the data register
(3F5h/375h). The first byte identifies the command and the remaining bytes define the parameters of the command. The Main Status register (3F4h/374h) provides data flow control for the diskette drive controller and must be polled between each byte transfer during the
Command phase.
The Execution phase starts as soon as the last byte of the Command phase is received. An
Execution phase may involve the transfer of data to and from the diskette drive, a mechnical control function of the drive, or an operation that remains internal to the diskette drive controller.
Data transfers (writes or reads) with the diskette drive controller are by DMA, using the DRQ2 and DACK2- signals for control.
The Results phase consists of the CPU reading a series of status bytes (from the data register
(3F5h/375h)) that indicate the results of the command. Note that some commands do not have a
Result phase, in which case the Execution phase can be followed by a Command phase.
During periods of inactivity, the diskette drive controller is in a non-operation mode known as the
Idle phase.
5.3.1 Diskette Drive Programming
Programming the diskette drive interface consists of configuration, which occurs typically during
POST, and control, which occurs at runtime.
Diskette Drive Interface Configuration
The diskette drive controller must be configured for a specific address and also must be enabled before it can be used. Address selection and enabling of the diskette drive interface are affected by firmware through the PnP configuration registers of the 47B397 I/O controller during POST.
The configuration registers are accessed through I/O registers 2Eh (index) and 2Fh (data) after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h to I/O port 2Eh. The diskette drive I/F is initiated by firmware selecting logical device 0 of the 47B397 using the following sequence:
1. Write 07h to I/O register 2Eh.
2. Write 00h to I/O register 2Fh (this selects the diskette drive I/F).
3. Write 30h to I/O register 2Eh.
4. Write 01h to I/O register 2Fh (this activates the interface).
Writing AAh to 2Eh deactivates the configuration phase. The diskette drive I/F configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-7
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-7.
Diskette Drive Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address
30h
60-61h
F2h
F4h
F5h
74h
F0h
F1h
Function
Activate
Base Address
DMA Channel Select
DD Mode
DD Option
DD Type
DD 0
DD 1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset
Value
01h
03F0h
06h
02h
02h
00h
FFh
00h
00h
For detailed configuration register information refer to the SMSC data sheet for the LPC47B397
I/O component.
5-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
Diskette Drive Interface Control
The BIOS function INT 13 provides basic control of the diskette drive interface. The diskette drive interface can be controlled by software through the LPC47B397's I/O-mapped registers listed in Table 5-8. The diskette drive controller of the LPC47B397 operates in the PC/AT mode in these systems.
Table 5-8.
Diskette Drive Interface Control Registers
Primary
Address
Second.
Address Register
3F0h 370h
3F1h 371h
Status Register A:
<7> Interrupt pending
<6> Reserved (always 1)
<5> STEP pin status (active high)
<4> TRK 0 status (active high)
<3> HDSEL status (0 = side 0, 1 = side 1)
<2> INDEX status (active high)
<1> WR PRTK status (0 = disk is write protected)
<0> Direction (0 = outward, 1 = inward)
Status Register B:
<7,6> Reserved (always 1’s)
<5> DOR bit 0 status
<4> Write data toggle
<3> Read data toggle
<2> WGATE status (active high)
<1,0> MTR 2, 1 ON- status (active high)
3F2h
3F3h
372h
373h
Digital Output Register (DOR):
<7,6> Reserved
<5,4> Motor 1, 0 enable (active high)
<3> DMA enable (active high)
<2> Reset (active low)
<1,0> Drive select (00 = Drive 1, 01 = Drive 2, 10 = Reserved, 11 =
Tape drive)
Tape Drive Register (available for compatibility)
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-9
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-8. (Continued)
Diskette Drive Interface Control Registers
Primary
Address
Second.
Address Register
3F4h 374h
3F5h 375h
Main Status Register (MSR):
<7> Request for master (host can transfer data) (active high)
<6> Transfer direction (0 – write, 1 = read)
<5> non-DMA execution (active high)
<4> Command busy (active high)
<3,2> Reserved
<1,0> Drive 1, 2 busy (active high)
Data Rate Select Register (DRSR):
<7> Software reset (active high)
<6> Low power mode enable (active high)
<5> Reserved (0)
<4..2> Precompensation select (default = 000)
<1,0> Data rate select (00 = 500 Kb/s, 01 = 300 Kb/s, 10 = 250
Kb/s, 11 = 2/1 Mb/s)
Data Register:
<7..0> Data
3F6h
3F7h
376h
377h
Reserved
Digital Input Register (DIR):
<7> DSK CHG status (records opposite value of pin)
<6..0> Reserved (0’s)
Configuration Control Register (CCR):
<7..2> Reserved
<1,0> Data rate select (00 = 500 Kb/s, 01 = 300 Kb/s, 10 = 250
Kb/s, 11 = 2/1 Mb/s)
R/W
R
W
R/W
--
R
W
NOTE: The most recently written data rate value to either DRSR or CCR will be in effect.
5-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.3.2 Diskette Drive Connector
This system uses a standard 34-pin connector (refer to Figure 5-3 and Table 5-9 for the pinout) for diskette drives. Drive power is supplied through a separate connector.
2 4
1
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24 26
23 25
28
27
30
29
32 34
31 33
Figure 5-3. 34-Pin Diskette Drive Connector.
Table 5-9.
34-Pin Diskette Drive Connector Pinout
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
6
7
4
5
2
3
Pin Signal
1 GND
LOW DEN-
---
MEDIA ID-
GND
DRV 4 SEL-
GND
Description
Ground
Low density select
(KEY)
Media identification
Ground
Drive 4 select
Ground
INDEX-
GND
Media index is detected 25
Ground 26
MTR 1 ONActivates drive motor
GND Ground
27
28
DRV 2 SEL-
GND
DRV 1 SEL-
GND
Drive 2 select
Ground
Drive 1 select
Ground
MTR 2 ONActivates drive motor
GND Ground
33
34
29
30
31
32
21
22
23
24
Pin
18
19
20
GND
TRK 00-
GND
WR PRTK-
GND
RD DATA-
GND
SIDE SEL-
GND
DSK CHG-
Signal
DIR-
GND
STEP-
GND
WR DATA-
GND
WR ENABLE-
Description
Drive head direction control
Ground
Drive head track step cntrl.
Ground
Write data
Ground
Enable for WR DATA-
Ground
Heads at track 00 indicator
Ground
Media write protect status
Ground
Data and clock read off disk
Ground
Head select (side 0 or 1)
Ground
Drive door opened indicator
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-11
Input/Output Interfaces
Systems covered in this guide may include one RS-232-C type serial interface to transmit and receive asynchronous serial data with external devices. Some systems may allow the installation of a second serial interface through an adapter that consists of a PCI bracket and a cable that attaches to header P52 on the system board. The serial interface function is provided by the
LPC47B397 I/O controller component that includes two NS16C550-compatible UARTs.
The UART supports the standard baud rates up through 115200, and also special high speed rates of 239400 and 460800 baud. The baud rate of the UART is typically set to match the capability of the connected device. While most baud rates may be set at runtime, baud rates 230400 and
460800 must be set during the configuration phase.
5.4.1 Serial Connector
The serial interface uses a DB-9 connector as shown in the following figure with the pinout listed in Table 5-10.
Figure 5-4. Serial Interface Connector (Male DB-9 as viewed from rear of chassis)
3
4
5
Pin Signal
1
2
CD
RX Data
TX Data
DTR
GND
Table 5-10.
DB-9 Serial Connector Pinout
Description
Carrier Detect
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Ground
8
9
--
Pin Signal
6
7
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
--
Description
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicator
--
The standard RS-232-C limitation of 50 feet (or less) of cable between the DTE (computer) and
DCE (modem) should be followed to minimize transmission errors. Higher baud rates may require shorter cables.
5.4.2 Serial Interface Programming
Programming the serial interfaces consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.
Serial Interface Configuration
The serial interface must be configured for a specific address range (COM1, COM2, etc.) and also must be activated before it can be used. Address selection and activation of the serial interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B397 I/O controller.
5-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
The serial interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-11.
Serial Interface Configuration Registers
Index Address
30h
60h
61h
70h
F0h
Function
Activate
Base Address MSB
Base Address LSB
Interrupt Select
Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Serial Interface Control
The BIOS function INT 14 provides basic control of the serial interface. The serial interface can be directly controlled by software through the I/O-mapped registers listed in Table 5-12.
Table 5-12.
Serial Interface Control Registers
COM1
Addr.
3F8h
COM2
Addr.
Register
2F8h Receive Data Buffer
Transmit Data Buffer
Baud Rate Divisor Register 0 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)
3F9h
3FAh
3FBh
3FCh
3FDh
3FEh
2F9h Baud Rate Divisor Register 1 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)
Interrupt Enable Register
2FAh Interrupt ID Register
FIFO Control Register
2FBh Line Control Register
2FCh Modem Control Register
2FDh Line Status Register
2FEh Modem Status
R/W
R
W
W
W
R/W
R
W
R/W
R/W
R
R
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-13
Input/Output Interfaces
■
■
■
Systems covered in this guide may include a parallel interface for connection to a peripheral device with a compatible interface, the most common being a printer. The parallel interface function is integrated into the LPC47B397 I/O controller component and provides bi-directional
8-bit parallel data transfers with a peripheral device. The parallel interface supports three main modes of operation:
Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode
These three modes (and their submodes) provide complete support as specified for an IEEE 1284 parallel port.
5.5.1 Standard Parallel Port Mode
The Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode uses software-based protocol and includes two sub-modes of operation, compatible and extended, both of which can provide data transfers up to
150 KB/s. In the compatible mode, CPU write data is simply presented on the eight data lines. A
CPU read of the parallel port yields the last data byte that was written.
The following steps define the standard procedure for communicating with a printing device:
1. The system checks the Printer Status register. If the Busy, Paper Out, or Printer Fault signals are indicated as being active, the system either waits for a status change or generates an error message.
2. The system sends a byte of data to the Printer Data register, then pulses the printer STROBE signal (through the Printer Control register) for at least 500 ns.
3. The system then monitors the Printer Status register for acknowledgment of the data byte before sending the next byte.
In extended mode, a direction control bit (CTR 37Ah, bit <5>) controls the latching of output data while allowing a CPU read to fetch data present on the data lines, thereby providing bi-directional parallel transfers to occur.
The SPP mode uses three registers for operation: the Data register (DTR), the Status register
(STR) and the Control register (CTR). Address decoding in SPP mode includes address lines A0 and A1.
5.5.2 Enhanced Parallel Port Mode
In Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode, increased data transfers are possible (up to 2 MB/s) due to a hardware protocol that provides automatic address and strobe generation. EPP revisions 1.7 and 1.9 are both supported. For the parallel interface to be initialized for EPP mode, a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with EPP mode.
If compatible, then EPP mode can be used. In EPP mode, system timing is closely coupled to
EPP timing. A watchdog timer is used to prevent system lockup.
Five additional registers are available in EPP mode to handle 16- and 32-bit CPU accesses with the parallel interface. Address decoding includes address lines A0, A1, and A2.
5-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.5.3 Extended Capabilities Port Mode
The Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode, like EPP, also uses a hardware protocol-based design that supports transfers up to 2 MB/s. Automatic generation of addresses and strobes as well as Run Length Encoding (RLE) decompression is supported by ECP mode. The ECP mode includes a bi-directional FIFO buffer that can be accessed by the CPU using DMA or programmed I/O. For the parallel interface to be initialized for ECP mode, a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with ECP mode. If compatible, then ECP mode can be used.
Ten control registers are available in ECP mode to handle transfer operations. In accessing the control registers, the base address is determined by address lines A2-A9, with lines A0, A1, and
A10 defining the offset address of the control register. Registers used for FIFO operations are accessed at their base address + 400h (i.e., if configured for LPT1, then 378h + 400h = 778h).
The ECP mode includes several sub-modes as determined by the Extended Control register. Two submodes of ECP allow the parallel port to be controlled by software. In these modes, the FIFO is cleared and not used, and DMA and RLE are inhibited.
5.5.4 Parallel Interface Programming
Programming the parallel interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during
POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.
Parallel Interface Configuration
The parallel interface must be configured for a specific address range (LPT1, LPT2, etc.) and also must be enabled before it can be used. When configured for EPP or ECP mode, additional considerations must be taken into account. Address selection, enabling, and EPP/ECP mode parameters of the parallel interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the
LPC47B397 I/O controller. Address selection and enabling are automatically done by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software.
The parallel interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-13.
Parallel Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address Function
30h
60h
Activate
Base Address MSB
61h
70h
74h
F0h
F1h
Base Address LSB
Interrupt Select
DMA Channel Select
Mode Register
Mode Register 2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset Value
00h
00h
00h
00h
04h
00h
00h
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-15
Input/Output Interfaces
Parallel Interface Control
The BIOS function INT 17 provides simplified control of the parallel interface. Basic functions such as initialization, character printing, and printer status are provide by subfunctions of INT
17. The parallel interface is controllable by software through a set of I/O mapped registers. The number and type of registers available depends on the mode used (SPP, EPP, or ECP). Table 5-14 lists the parallel registers and associated functions based on mode.
I/O
Address
Table 5-14.
Parallel Interface Control Registers
Register
Base Data
Base + 1h Status
Base + 2h Control
Base + 3h
Base + 4h
Base + 5h
Base + 6h
Address
Data Port 0
Data Port 1
Data Port 2
Base + 7h Data Port 3
Base + 400h Parallel Data FIFO
Base + 400h ECP Data FIFO
Base + 400h Test FIFO
Base + 400h Configuration Register A
Base + 401h Configuration Register B
Base + 402h Extended Control Register
Base Address:
LPT1 = 378h
LPT2 = 278h
LPT3 = 3BCh
SPP
Mode
Ports
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
--
--
--
--
EPP
Mode
Ports
--
--
--
LPT1,2
--
--
--
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
ECP
Mode
Ports
--
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
--
--
--
--
5-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.5.5 Parallel Interface Connector
Figure 5-5 and Table 5-15 show the connector and pinout of the parallel interface connector.
Note that some signals are redefined depending on the port's operational mode.
Figure 5-5. Parallel Interface Connector (Female DB-25 as viewed from rear of chassis)
Table 5-15.
DB-25 Parallel Connector Pinout
5
6
3
4
Pin Signal Function
1
2
STB-
D0
Strobe / Write [1]
Data 0
D1
D2
D3
D4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
7
8
D5
D6
9 D7
10 ACK-
11 BSY
12 PE
13 SLCT
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Acknowledge / Interrupt [1]
Busy / Wait [1]
Paper End / User defined [1]
Select / User defined [1]
Pin Signal Function
14 LF-
15 ERR-
Line Feed [2]
Error [3]
16 INITInitialize Paper [4]
17 SLCTINSelect In / Address. Strobe [1]
18 GND
19 GND
Ground
Ground
24
25
--
20 GND
21 GND
22
23
GND
GND
GND
GND
--
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
--
NOTES:
[1] Standard and ECP mode function / EPP mode function
[2] EPP mode function: Data Strobe
ECP modes: Auto Feed or Host Acknowledge
[3] EPP mode: user defined
ECP modes:Fault or Peripheral Req.
[4] EPP mode: Reset
ECP modes: Initialize or Reverse Req.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-17
Input/Output Interfaces
5.6 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface
The keyboard/pointing device interface function is provided by the LPC47B397 I/O controller component, which integrates 8042-compatible keyboard controller logic (hereafter referred to as simply the “8042”) to communicate with the keyboard and pointing device using bi-directional serial data transfers. The 8042 handles scan code translation and password lock protection for the keyboard as well as communications with the pointing device. This section describes the interface itself. The keyboard is discussed in the Appendix C.
5.6.1 Keyboard Interface Operation
The data/clock link between the 8042 and the keyboard is uni-directional for Keyboard Mode 1 and bi-directional for Keyboard Modes 2 and 3. (These modes are discussed in detail in
Appendix C). This section describes Mode 2 (the default) mode of operation.
Communication between the keyboard and the 8042 consists of commands (originated by either the keyboard or the 8042) and scan codes from the keyboard. A command can request an action or indicate status. The keyboard interface uses IRQ1 to get the attention of the CPU.
The 8042 can send a command to the keyboard at any time. When the 8042 wants to send a command, the 8042 clamps the clock signal from the keyboard for a minimum of 60 us. If the keyboard is transmitting data at that time, the transmission is allowed to finish. When the 8042 is ready to transmit to the keyboard, the 8042 pulls the data line low, causing the keyboard to respond by pulling the clock line low as well, allowing the start bit to be clocked out of the 8042.
The data is then transferred serially, LSb first, to the keyboard (Figure 5-6). An odd parity bit is sent following the eighth data bit. After the parity bit is received, the keyboard pulls the data line low and clocks this condition to the 8042. When the keyboard receives the stop bit, the clock line is pulled low to inhibit the keyboard and allow it to process the data.
Data
Clock
Start
Bit
0
Th
D0
(LSb)
1
D1
0
Tcy
D2
1
D3
1
D4
0
D5
1
D6
1
Tcl Tch
Parameter Minimum Maximum
Tcy (Cycle Time) 0 us 80 us
Tcl (Clock Low) 25 us 35 us
Tch (Clock High) 25 us 45 us
Th (Data Hold) 0 us 25 us
Tss (Stop Bit Setup) 8 us 20 us
Tsh (Stop Bit Hold) 15 us 25 us
D7
(MSb)
1
Parity Stop
Bit
1 0
Tss Tsh
Figure 5-6. 8042-To-Keyboard Transmission of Code EDh, Timing Diagram
Control of the data and clock signals is shared by the 8042and the keyboard depending on the originator of the transferred data. Note that the clock signal is always generated by the keyboard.
After the keyboard receives a command from the 8042, the keyboard returns an ACK code. If a parity error or timeout occurs, a Resend command is sent to the 8042.
5-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-16 lists and describes commands that can be issued by the 8042 to the keyboard.
Command
Set/Reset Status Indicators
Echo
Invalid Command
Select Alternate Scan Codes
Read ID
Set Typematic Rate/Display
Enable
Default Disable
Set Default
Set Keys—Typematic
Table 5-16.
8042-To-Keyboard Commands
Value
EDh
Description
Enables LED indicators. Value EDh is followed by an option byte that specifies the indicator as follows:
Bits <7..3> not used
Bit <2>, Caps Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Bit <1>, NUM Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Bit <0>, Scroll Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Keyboard returns EEh when previously enabled.
EEh
EFh/F1h These commands are not acknowledged.
F0h Instructs the keyboard to select another set of scan codes and sends an option byte after ACK is received:
01h = Mode 1
02h = Mode 2
03h = Mode 3
F2h Instructs the keyboard to stop scanning and return two keyboard ID bytes.
F3h
F4h
F5h
F6h
F7h
Instructs the keyboard to change typematic rate and delay to specified values:
Bit <7>, Reserved—0
Bits <6,5>, Delay Time
00 = 250 ms
01 = 500 ms
10 = 750 ms
11 = 1000 ms
Bits <4..0>, Transmission Rate:
00000 = 30.0 ms
00001 = 26.6 ms
00010 = 24.0 ms
00011 = 21.8 ms
:
11111 = 2.0 ms
Instructs keyboard to clear output buffer and last typematic key and begin key scanning.
Resets keyboard to power-on default state and halts scanning pending next 8042 command.
Resets keyboard to power-on default state and enable scanning.
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-19
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-16. (Continued)
8042-To-Keyboard Commands
Command
Set Keys—Make/Brake
Value
F8h
Set Keys—Make
Set Keys—
Typematic/Make/Brake
Set Type Key—Typematic
F9h
FAh
Set Type Key—Make/Brake
Set Type Key—Make
Resend
Reset
FEh
FFh
Note: [1] Used in Mode 3 only.
FBh
FCh
FDh
Description
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
8042 detected error in keyboard transmission.
Resets program, runs keyboard BAT, defaults to Mode 2.
5.6.2 Pointing Device Interface Operating
The pointing device (typically a mouse) connects to a 6-pin DIN-type connector that is identical to the keyboard connector both physically and electrically. The operation of the interface (clock and data signal control) is the same as for the keyboard. The pointing device interface uses the
IRQ12 interrupt.
5.6.3 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Programming
Programming the keyboard interface consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.
8042 Configuration
The keyboard/pointing device interface must be enabled and configured for a particular speed before it can be used. Enabling and speed parameters of the 8042 logic are affected through the
PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B397 I/O controller. Enabling and speed control are automatically set by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software.
5-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
The keyboard interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-17.
Keyboard Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address Function
30h
70h
Activate
Primary Interrupt Select
72h
F0h
Secondary Interrupt Select
Reset and A20 Select
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
8042 Control
■
■
■
■
The BIOS function INT 16 is typically used for controlling interaction with the keyboard.
Sub-functions of INT 16 conduct the basic routines of handling keyboard data (i.e., translating the keyboard's scan codes into ASCII codes). The keyboard/pointing device interface is accessed by the CPU through I/O mapped ports 60h and 64h, which provide the following functions:
Output buffer reads
Input buffer writes
Status reads
Command writes
Ports 60h and 64h can be accessed using the IN instruction for a read and the OUT instruction for a write. Prior to reading data from port 60h, the “Output Buffer Full” status bit (64h, bit <0>) should be checked to ensure data is available. Likewise, before writing a command or data, the
“Input Buffer Empty” status bit (64h, bit <1>) should also be checked to ensure space is available.
I/O Port 60h
I/O port 60h is used for accessing the input and output buffers. This register is used to send and receive data from the keyboard and the pointing device. This register is also used to send the second byte of multi-byte commands to the 8042 and to receive responses from the 8042 for commands that require a response.
A read of 60h by the CPU yields the byte held in the output buffer. The output buffer holds data that has been received from the keyboard and is to be transferred to the system.
A CPU write to 60h places a data byte in the input byte buffer and sets the CMD/ DATA bit of the
Status register to DATA. The input buffer is used for transferring data from the system to the keyboard. All data written to this port by the CPU will be transferred to the keyboard except bytes that follow a multibyte command that was written to 64h
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-21
Input/Output Interfaces
I/O Port 64h
I/O port 64h is used for reading the status register and for writing commands. A read of 64h by the CPU will yield the status byte defined as follows:
Bit Function
7..4
General Purpose Flags.
3 CMD/DATA Flag (reflects the state of A2 during a CPU write).
0 = Data
1 = Command
2
1
0
General Purpose Flag.
Input Buffer Full. Set (to 1) upon a CPU write. Cleared by
IN A, DBB instruction.
Output Buffer Full (if set). Cleared by a CPU read of the buffer.
A CPU write to I/O port 64h places a command value into the input buffer and sets the
CMD/DATA bit of the status register (bit <3>) to CMD.
Table 5-18 lists the commands that can be sent tothe 8042 by the CPU. The 8042 uses IRQ1 for gaining the attention of the CPU.
Value
20h
60h
A4h
A5h
A6h
A7h
A8h
Table 5-18.
CPU Commands to the 8042
Command Description
Put current command byte in port 60h.
Load new command byte.
Test password installed. Tests whether or not a password is installed in the 8042:
If FAh is returned, password is installed.
If F1h is returned, no password is installed.
Load password. This multi-byte operation places a password in the 8042 using the following manner:
1. Write A5h to port 64h.
2. Write each character of the password in 9-bit scan code (translated) format to port 60h.
3. Write 00h to port 60h.
Enable security. This command places the 8042 in password lock mode following the A5h command. The correct password must then be entered before further communication with the
8042 is allowed.
Disable pointing device. This command sets bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, pulling the clock line of the pointing device interface low.
Enable pointing device. This command clears bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, activating the clock line of the pointing device interface.
5-22 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-18. (Continued)
CPU Commands to the 8042
Value
A9h
AAh
ABh
ADh
AEh
C0h
C2h
Command Description
Test the clock and data lines of the pointing device interface and place test results in the output buffer.
00h = No error detected
01h = Clock line stuck low
02h = Clock line stuck high
03h = Data line stuck low
04h = Data line stuck high
Initialization. This command causes the 8042 to inhibit the keyboard and pointing device and places 55h into the output buffer.
Test the clock and data lines of the keyboard interface and place test results in the output buffer.
00h = No error detected
01h = Clock line stuck low
02h = Clock line stuck high
03h = Data line stuck low
04h = Data line stuck high
Disable keyboard command (sets bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).
Enable keyboard command (clears bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).
Read input port of the 8042. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the input port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h.
Poll Input Port High. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <7..4> of the input port into the upper half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.
C3h
D0h
Poll Input Port Low. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <3..0> of the input port into the lower half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.
Read output port. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the output port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h.
D1h Write output port. This command directs the 8042 to place the next byte written to port 60h into the output port (only bit <1> can be changed).
D2h
D3h
D4h
Echo keyboard data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h as if it originated from the keyboard. No 11-to-9 bit translation takes place but an interrupt
(IRQ1) is generated if enabled.
Echo pointing device data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port
60h as if it originated from the pointing device. An interrupt (IRQ12) is generated if enabled.
Write to pointing device. Directs the 8042 to send the next byte written to 60h to the pointing device.
E0h Read test inputs. Directs the 8042 to transfer the test bits 1 and 0 into bits <1,0> of the output buffer.
F0h-FFh Pulse output port. Controls the pulsing of bits <3..0> of the output port (0 = pulse, 1 = don’t pulse). Note that pulsing bit <0> will reset the system.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-23
Input/Output Interfaces
5.6.4 Keyboard/Pointing Device Interface Connector
The legacy-light model provides separate PS/2 connectors for the keyboard and pointing device.
Both connectors are identical both physically and electrically. Figure 5-7 and Table 5-19 show the connector and pinout of the keyboard/pointing device interface connectors.
Figure 5-7. PS/2 Keyboard or Pointing Device Interface Connector (as viewed from rear of chassis)
Pin Signal
1
2
3
DATA
NC
GND
Table 5-19.
Keyboard/Pointing Device Connector Pinout
Description
Data
Not Connected
Ground
Pin Signal
4
5
6
+ 5 VDC
CLK
NC
Description
Power
Clock
Not Connected
5-24 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.7 Universal Serial Bus Interface
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface provides asynchronous/isochronous data transfers with compatible peripherals such as keyboards, printers, or modems. This high-speed interface supports hot-plugging of compatible devices, making possible system configuration changes without powering down or even rebooting systems.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the USB interface is provided by the 82801 component. All systems provide as total of eight USB ports, two USB ports accessible at the front of the unit and six USB ports on the rear panel. The USB ports are dynamically configured to either a USB 1.1 controller or the USB 2.0 controller depending on the capability of the peripheral device. The 1.1 controllers provide a maximum transfer rate of 12 Mb/s while the 2.0 controller provides a maximum transfer rate of 480 Mb/s.
82801 ICH6
1.1 0
USB 1.1
Cntlr. #1
1.1 1
Data 0
Data 1
Rear Panel
USB Port 1
USB Port 2
1.1 2
USB 1.1
Cntlr. #2
1.1 3
Data 2
Data 3
USB Port 3
USB Port 4
1.1 4
USB 1.1
Cntlr. #3
1.1 5
Data 4
Data 5
USB Port 5
1.1 6
USB 1.1
Cntlr. #4
1.1 7
Data 6
USB Port 6
Front Panel
USB Port 7
Data 7
USB Port 8
USB 2.0
Cntlr.
2.0 0
2.0 1
2.0 2
2.0 3
2.0 4
2.0 5
2.0 6
2.0 7
Figure 5-8. USB I/F, Block Diagram
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-25
Input/Output Interfaces
5.7.1 USB Data Formats
■
■
■
■
■
The USB I/F uses non-return-to-zero inverted (NRZI) encoding for data transmissions, in which a 1 is represented by no change (between bit times) in signal level and a 0 is represented by a change in signal level. Bit stuffing is employed prior to NRZ1 encoding so that in the event a string of 1's is transmitted (normally resulting in a steady signal level) a 0 is inserted after every six consecutive 1's to ensure adequate signal transitions in the data stream. The USB transmissions consist of packets using one of four types of formats (Figure 5-9) that include two or more of seven field types.
■ Sync Field—8-bit field that starts every packet and is used by the receiver to align the incoming signal with the local clock.
■ Packet Identifier (PID) Field—8-bit field sent with every packet to identify the attributes (in. out, start-of-frame (SOF), setup, data, acknowledge, stall, preamble) and the degree of error correction to be applied.
Address Field—7-bit field that provides source information required in token packets.
Endpoint Field—4-bit field that provides destination information required in token packets.
Frame Field—11-bit field sent in Start-of-Frame (SOF) packets that are incremented by the host and sent only at the start of each frame.
Data Field—0-1023-byte field of data.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Field—5- or 16-bit field used to check transmission integrity.
Token Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
SOF Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
Data Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
Handshake Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
Addr. Field
(7 bits)
ENDP. Field
(4 bits)
CRC Field
Frame Field
(11 bits)
Data Field
(0-1023 bytes)
CRC Field
(5 bits)
(5 bits)
CRC Field
(16 bits)
Figure 5-9. USB Packet Formats
Data is transferred LSb first. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is applied to all packets (except a handshake packet). A packet causing a CRC error is generally completely ignored by the receiver.
5-26 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.7.2 USB Programming
Programming the USB interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during POST, and control, which occurs at runtime.
USB Configuration
Each USB controller functions as a PCI device within the 82801 component and is configured using PCI Configuration Registers as listed in Table 5-20.
NOTE:
PCI Config.
Address
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
Note:
[1] USB 1.1 #1= 24D2h
USB 1.1 #2 = 24D4h
USB 1.1 #3 = 24D7h
USB 1.1 #4 = 24DDh
USB 2.0 = 24DDh
Register
Vendor ID
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming I/F
Sub Class Code
Base Class Code
Table 5-20.
USB Interface Configuration Registers
Reset
Value
PCI Config.
Address Register
8086h 0Eh Header Type
[1] 20-23h
0000h 2C, 2Dh
0280h 3Ch
00h 3Dh
I/O Space Base Address
Sub. Vender ID
Interrupt Line
Interrupt Pin
00h 60h
03h C0, C1h
0Ch C4h
Serial Bus Release No.
10h
USB Leg. Kybd./Ms. Cntrl.
2000h
USB Resume Enable 00h
Reset
Value
00h
1d
00h
00h
03h
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-27
Input/Output Interfaces
USB Control
The USB is controlled through I/O registers as listed in table 5-21.
Table 5-21.
USB Control Registers
I/O Address Register
00, 01h Command
02, 03h
04, 05h
Status
Interupt Enable
06, 07
08, 0B
0Ch
10, 11h
12, 13h
18h
Frame Number
Frame List Base Address
Start of Frame Modify
Port 1 Status/Control
Port 2 Status/Control
Test Data
Default Value
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
40h
0080h
0080h
00h
5.7.3 USB Connector
These systems provide type-A USB ports as shown in Figure 5-10 below.
1 2 3 4
Figure 5-10. Universal Serial Bus Connector (Female)
Pin Signal Description
Table 5-22.
USB Connector Pinout
Pin Signal Description
1 Vcc +5 VDC 3 USB+ Data (plus)
2 USBData (minus) 4 GND Ground
5-28 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.7.4 USB Cable Data
The recommended cable length between the host and the USB device should be no longer than sixteen feet for full-channel (12 MB/s) operation, depending on cable specification (see following table).
Conductor Size
20 AWG
22 AWG
24 AWG
26 AWG
28 AWG
Table 5-23.
USB Cable Length Data
Resistance
0.036 Ω
0.057 Ω
0.091 Ω
0.145 Ω
0.232 Ω
Maximum Length
16.4 ft (5.00 m)
9.94 ft (3.03 m)
6.82 ft (2.08 m)
4.30 ft (1.31 m)
2.66 ft (0.81 m)
NOTE:
For sub-channel (1.5 MB/s) operation and/or when using sub-standard cable shorter lengths may be allowable and/or necessary.
The shield, chassis ground, and power ground should be tied together at the host end but left unconnected at the device end to avoid ground loops.
Signal
Color code
Insulation color
Data +
Data -
Green
White
Vcc
Ground
Red
Black
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-29
Input/Output Interfaces
A block diagram of the audio subsystem is shown in Figure 5-11. These systems use the AC97
Audio Controller of the 82801 component to access and control an Analog Devices AD1981B
Audio Codec, which provides the analog-to-digital (ADC) and digital-to-analog (DAC) conversions as well as mixing and equalizer functions. All control functions such as volume, audio source selection, and sampling rate are controlled through software through the AC97
Audio Controller of the 82801 ICH component. Control data and digital audio streams (record and playback) are transferred between the Audio Controller and the Audio Codec over the AC97
Link Bus. The codec mono analog output is applied to a single-channel amplifier that drives the internal speaker. Plugging headphones into the Headphone jack results in an active Spkr Mute signal used by the codec to ,silence the internal speaker
The analog interfaces allowing connection to external audio devices include:
Mic In—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is specifically designed for connection of a condenser microphone with an impedance of 10-K ohms. This is the default recording input after a system reset. On systems with both a front and rear microphone jack either jack is available for use (but not simultaneously).
Line In—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is specifically designed for connection of a high-impedance (10k-ohm) audio source such as a tape deck.
Headphones Out—This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is designed for connecting a set of 16-ohm (nom.) stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging into the
Headphones jack mutes the signal to the internal speaker and the Line Out jack as well.
Line Out—This output uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack for connecting left and right channel line-level signals (20-K ohm impedance). A typical connection would be to a tape recorder's Line In (Record In) jacks, an amplifier's Line In jacks, or to powered speakers that contain amplifiers.
Line In
82801 ICH
PCI
Bus
AC’97
Audio
Cntlr.
PC Beep Audio
(L)
(R)
AUX In Header P11 [1]
Aux Audio (L)
Aux Audio (R)
Audio
Codec
AC97
Link Bus
Mono
Audio
Spkr Mute
HP Out Audio (L/R)
TDA
7056
P23
CD ROM Header P7 [2]
CD Audio (L)
CD Audio (R)
Mic In
Audio
Bias
P23
P6
(L)
(R)
+
-
Internal
Speaker
Headphones/
Line Out
Figure 5-11. Audio Subsystem Functional Block Diagram
5-30 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.1 AC97 Audio Controller
The AC97 Audio Controller is a PCI device that is integrated into the 82801 ICH component and supports the following functions:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Read/write access to audio codec registers
16-bit stereo PCM output @ up to 48 KHz sampling
16-bit stereo PCM input @ up to 48 KHz sampling
Acoustic echo correction for microphone
AC'97 Link Bus
ACPI power management
5.8.2 AC97 Link Bus
The audio controller and the audio codec communicate over a five-signal AC97 Link Bus (Figure
5-12). The AC97 Link Bus includes two serial data lines (SD OUT/SD IN) that transfer control and PCM audio data serially to and from the audio codec using a time-division multiplexed
(TDM) protocol. The data lines are qualified by a 12.288 MHz BIT_CLK signal driven by the audio codec. Data is transferred in frames synchronized by the 48-KHz SYNC signal, which is derived from the clock signal and driven by the audio controller. The SYNC signal is high during the frame's tag phase then falls during T17 and remains low during the data phase. A frame consists of one 16-bit tag slot followed by twelve 20-bit data slots. When asserted (typically during a power cycle), the RESET- signal (not shown) will reset all audio registers to their default values.
(12.288 MHz)
BIT_CLK
SYNC
(48 KHz)
T1 T2 T18 T19 T38 T39 T58
SD OUT or SD IN
Codec
Ready
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 0 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 0 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 0
Slot 0 (Tag) Slot 1 (Data) Slot 2 (Data)
Slot Description
0 Bit 15: Frame valid bit
Bits 14-3: Slots 1-12 valid bits
Bits 2-0: Codec ID
1 Command address: Bit 19, R/W; Bits 18..12, reg. Index; Bits 11..0, reserved.
Bit 19
3
4
Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, left channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)
Bits 3-0 all zeros
Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, right channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)
Bits 3-0 all zeros
5 Modem codec data (not used in this system)
6-11 Reserved
Figure 5-12. AC97 Link Bus Protocol
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-31
Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.3 Audio Codec
The audio codec provides pulse code modulation (PCM) coding and decoding of audio information as well as the selection and/or mixing of analog channels. As shown in Figure 5-13, analog audio from a microphone, tape, or CD can be selected and, if to be recorded (saved) onto a disk drive, routed through an analog-to-digital converter (ADC). The resulting left and right
PCM record data are muxed into a time-division-multiplexed (TDM) data stream (SD IN signal) that is routed to the audio controller. Playback (PB) audio takes the reverse path from the audio controller to the audio codec as SD OUT data and is decoded and either routed through an equalizer or applied directly to the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The codec supports simultaneous record and playback of stereo (left and right) audio. The Sample Rate Generator may be set for sampling frequencies up to 48 KHz.
The integrated analog mixer provides the computer control-console functionality handling multiple audio inputs.
Mic In
Line In (L)
Line In (R)
CD In (L)
CD In (R)
SPDIF
Analog
Output
Circuits
HP Out L
HP Out R
S
E
L
(L)
(L)
(R)
(R)
Audio
Format
Σ/Mixer c t o r
S e l e
Left
Audio
Right
Audio
Rec
Gain
Rec
Gain
ADC
Rec
Data (L)
ADC
Rec
Data (R)
Sample
Rate
Gen.
PB
Gain
PB
Gain
DAC
PB
Data (L)
EQ
PB
Data (R)
DAC
EQ
AC97
Link
I/F
SD IN
SD Out
Audio
Controller
Figure 5-13. AD1981B Audio Codec Functional Block Diagram
All inputs and outputs are two-channel stereo except for the microphone input, which is inputted as a single-channel but mixed internally onto both left and right channels. The microphone input is the default active input. All block functions are controlled through index-addressed registers of the codec.
5-32 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.4 Audio Programming
Audio subsystem programming consists configuration, typically accomplished during POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.
Audio Configuration
The audio subsystem is configured according to PCI protocol through the AC97 audio controller function of the 82801 ICH. Table 5-24 lists the PCI configuration registers of the audio subsystem.
Table 5-24.
AC97 Audio Controller
PCI Configuration Registers (82801 Device 31/Function 5)
PCI Config.
Address Register
00-01h Vendor ID
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Eh
10-13h
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming
Sub-Class
Base Class Code
Header Type
Native Audio Mixer
Base Addr.
Value on
Reset
PCI
Config.
Address
8086h 14-17h
24D5h 18-1Bh
0000h 1C-2Bh
0280h 2C-2Dh
XXh 2E-2Fh
00h
01h
04h
00h
1
30-3Bh
3Ch
3Dh
3E-FFh
--
Register
Native Audio Bus
Mstr. Addr.
Reserved
Reserved
Subsystem Vender ID
Subsystem ID
Reserved
Interrupt Line
Interrupt Pin
Reserved
--
Value on
Reset
1
1h
1h
0000h
0000h
--
00h
02h
0’s
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-33
Input/Output Interfaces
Audio Control
The audio subsystem is controlled through a set of indexed registers that physically reside in the audio codec . The register addresses are decoded by the audio controller and forwarded to the audio codec over the AC97 Link Bus previously described. The audio codec's control registers
(Table 5-25) are mapped into 64 kilobytes of variable I/O space.
Table 5-25.
AC97 Audio Codec Control Registers
Offset Address or
Register
00h Reset
Value
On
Reset
Offset Address or
Register
0100h 14h Video Vol.
02h Master Vol.
04h Reserved
8000h 16h Aux Vol.
-18h PCM Out Vol.
06h Mono Mstr. Vol.
8000h 1Ah Record Sel.
08h Reserved -1Ch Record Gain
0Ah PC Beep Vol.
0Ch Phone In Vol.
0Eh Mic Vol.
10h Line In Vol.
12h CD Vol.
8000h 1Eh Reserved
8008h 20h Gen. Purpose
8008h 22h 3D Control
8808h 24h Reserved
8808h 26h Pwr Mgnt.
Value
On
Reset
Offset Address or
Register
8808h 28h Ext. Audio ID.
Value
On
Reset
0001h
8808h 2Ah Ext. Audio Ctrl/Sts 0000h
8808h 2Ch PCM DAC SRate BB80h
0000h 32h PCM ADC SRate
8000h 34h Reserved
BB80h
--
-72h Reserved
0000h 74h Serial Config.
0000h 76h Misc. Control Bits
-7Ch Vender ID1
000xh 7Eh Vender ID2
--
7x0xh
0404h
4144h
5340h
5-34 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.5 Audio Specifications
The specifications for the integrated AC97 audio subsystem are listed in Table 5-26.
Table 5-26.
AC97 Audio Subsystem Specifications
Parameter
Sampling Rate
Resolution
Nominal Input Voltage:
Mic In (w/+20 db gain)
Line In
Impedance:
Mic In
Line In
Line Out
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (input to Line Out)
Frequency Response (-3db to Line Output):
Line Input
Mic Input
A/D (PC record)
Line input
Mic input
D/A (PC playback)
Max. Power Output (with 10% THD):
Small Form Factor
Slim Desktop/Configurable Minitower
Input Gain Attenuation Range
Master Volume Range
Frequency Response:
Codec
Speaker (Small Form Factor)
Measurement
7040 KHz to 48 KHz
16 bit
.283 Vp-p
2.83 Vp-p
1 K ohms (nom)
10 K ohms (min)
800 ohms
90 db (nom)
20 Hz – 20 KHz
100 Hz – 12 KHz
20 Hz – 19.2 KHz
100 Hz – 8.8 Khz
20 Hz – 19.2 KHz
8 watts (into 8 ohms)
3 watts (into 16 ohms)
-46.5 db
-94.5 db
20–20 KHz
450–4000 Hz
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-35
Input/Output Interfaces
5-36
These systems provide 10/100/1000 Mbps network support through a Broadcom BCM5751 network interface controller (NIC), a PHY component, and a RJ-45 jack with integral status
LEDs. The 82562-equivalent controller integrated into the 82801 ICH component is not used
(disabled) in these systems. (Figure 5-14). The support firmware for the BCM5782 component is contained in the system (BIOS) ROM. The NIC can operate in half- or full-duplex modes, and provides auto-negotiation of both mode and speed. Half-duplex operation features an
Intel-proprietary collision reduction mechanism while full-duplex operation follows the IEEE
802.3x flow control specification.
Green LED
RJ-45
Connector
Broadcom
BCM5751
NIC
Tx/Rx Data
LAN I/F
Tx/Rx Data
Yellow LED
LED
Green
Yellow
Function
Activity/Li nk. Indicates network activity and link pulse reception.
Speed. Indicates link detection 100Mb/s mode.
■
■
■
Figure 5 14. Network Interface Controller Block Diagram
■
■
■
The Network Interface Controller includes the following features:
Dual high speed RISC controllers with 16-KB caches.
Triple-mode support with auto-switching between 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and
1000BASE-T.
Power management support for ACPI 1.1, PXE 2.0, WOL, ASF 1.0, IPMI
Cable testing capability
Link and Activity LED indicator drivers
The controller features high and low priority queues and provides priority-packet processing for networks that can support that feature. The controller's micro-machine processes transmit and receive frames independently and concurrently. Receive runt (under-sized) frames are not passed on as faulty data but discarded by the controller, which also directly handles such errors as collision detection or data under-run.
The NIC uses 3.3 VDC auxiliary power, which allows the controller to support Wake-On-LAN
(WOL) and Alert-On-LAN (AOL) functions while the main system is powered down.
✎
For the features in the following paragraphs to function as described, the system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet. Controlling unit power through a switchable power strip will, with the strip turned off, disable any wake, alert, or power mangement functionality.
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.9.1 Wake-On-LAN Support
The NIC supports the Wired-for-Management (WfM) standard of Wake-On-LAN (WOL) that allows the system to be booted up from a powered-down or low-power condition upon the detection of special packets received over a network. The NIC receives 3.3 VDC auxiliary power while the system unit is powered down in order to process special packets. The detection of a
Magic Packet by the NIC results in the PME- signal on the PCI bus to be asserted, initiating system wake-up from an ACPI S1 or S3 state.
5.9.2 Alert Standard Format Support
■
■
■
Alert Standard Format (ASF) support allows the NIC to communicate the occurrence of certain events over a network to an ASF 1.0-compliant management console and, if necessary, take action that may be required. The ASF communications can involve the following:
Alert messages sent by the client to the management console.
Maintenance requests sent by the management console to the client.
Description of client's ASF capabilities and characteristics.
The activation of ASF functionality requires minimal intervention of the user, typically requiring only booting a client system that is connected to a network with an ASF-compliant management console.
5.9.3 Power Management Support
The NIC features Wired-for-Management (WfM) support providing system wake up from network events (WOL) as well as generating system status messages (AOL) and supports ACPI power management environments. The controller receives 3.3 VDC (auxiliary) power as long as the system is plugged into a live AC receptacle, allowing support of wake-up events occurring over a network while the system is powered down or in a low-power state.
The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) functionality of system wake up is implemented through an ACPI-compliant OS and is the default power management mode. The following wakeup events may be individually enabled/disabled through the supplied software driver:
■ Magic Packet—Packet with node address repeated 16 times in data portion
✎
The following functions are supported in NDIS5 drivers but implemented through remote management software applications (such as LanDesk).
■
■
■
■
Individual address match—Packet with matching user-defined byte mask
Multicast address match—Packet with matching user-defined sample frame
ARP (address resolution protocol) packet
Flexible packet filtering—Packets that match defined CRC signature
The PROSet Application software (pre-installed and accessed through the System Tray or
Windows Control Panel) allows configuration of operational parameters such as WOL and duplex mode.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-37
Input/Output Interfaces
5.9.4 NIC Programming
Programming the NIC consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and control, which occurs at runtime. The Broadcom BCM5782 is configured as a PCI device and controlled through registers mapped in variable I/O space. The BIOS for the BCM5782 is contained within the HP/Compaq BIOS in system ROM. Refer to Broadcom documentation for details regarding
BCM5782 register programming.
5.9.5 NIC Connector
Figure 5-14 shows the RJ-45 connector used for the NIC interface. This connector includes the two status LEDs as part of the connector assembly.
Speed LED Activity LED
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Pin Description
1 Transmit+
2 Transmit-
3 Receive+
6 Receive-
4, 7, 8 Not used
Figure 5 15. Ethernet TPE Connector (RJ-45, viewed from card edge)
5-38 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Input/Output Interfaces
5.9.6 NIC Specifications
Parameter
Modes Supported
Standards Compliance
OS Driver Support
Boot ROM Support
F12 BIOS Support
Bus Inteface
Power Management Support
Table 5-27.
NIC Specifications
10BASE-T half duplex @ 10 Mb/s
10Base-T full duplex @ 20 Mb/s
100BASE-TX half duplex @ 100 Mb/s
100Base-TX full duplex @ 200 Mb/s
1000BASE-T half duplex @ 1 Gb/s
1000BASE-TX full duplex @ 2 Gb/s
IEEE 802.2
IEEE 802.3 & 802.3x
IEEE Intel priority packet (801.1p)
MS-DOS
MS Windows 3.1
MS Windows 95 (pre-OSR2), 98, and 2000
Professional, XP Home, XP Pro
MS Windows NT 3.51 & 4.0
Novell Netware 3.x, 4.x, 5x
Novell Netware/IntraNetWare
SCO UnixWare 7
Linux 2.2, 2.4
PXE 2.0
Intel PRO/100 Boot Agent (PXE 3.0, RPL)
Yes
PCI 2.2
ACPI, PCI Power Management Spec.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 5-39
Input/Output Interfaces
5-40 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
6
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes graphics subsystem that is integrated into the 82915G/GV GMCH component. This graphics subsystem employs the use of system memory to provide efficient, economical 2D and 3D performance.
The SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors may be upgraded by installing a graphics card into the
PCI Express x16 or the PCI 2.3 slot. The USDT form factor may be upgraded by installing graphics card into the PCI 2.3 slot. An installed PCI Express or PCI 2.3 graphics controller card will be detected by the BIOS during the boot sequence and the integrated graphics controller of the 82915G GMCH will then be disabled (refer to section 6.5 for more information on upgrading the graphics subsystem).
This chapter covers the following subjects:
■
■
■
■
Functional description (6.2), page 6-2
Display Modes (6.3), page 6-5
Upgrading graphics (6.4) , page 6-5
VGA Monitor connector (6.5), page 6-6
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-1
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
The Intel 915G/GV GMCH component includes an integrated graphics controller (IGC). (Figure
6-1). The IGC can directly drive an external, analog multi-scan monitor at resolutions up to and including 2048 x 1536 pixels. The IGC includes a memory management feature that allocates portions of system memory for use as the frame buffer and for storing textures and 3D effects.
The IGC provides two SDVO channels that are multiplexed through the PCI Express graphics interface. These SDVO ports may be used by an Advanced Digital Display (ADD2) card installed in the PCI Express graphics slot in driving two digital displays with a 200-megapixel clock.
The SSF, ST, MT, and CMT sytems may be upgraded by installing a separate PCI-E graphics card in the PCI Express x16 slot, which disables the onboard IGC. All systems may be also be upgraded by installing a PCI graphics card in teh PCI 2.3 slot.
82915G/GV GMCH
Monitor
RGB
Integrated
Graphics
Controller
PCI Express x16
Graphics slot [1]
PCI-E
& SDVO Data
PCI Expr. I/F [2]
SDRAM
Controller
DDR
SDRAM
(System
Memory)
NOTE:
[1] SFF, ST, MT, and CMT form factors only
[2] 82915G GMCH only
Figure 6-1. 915G-Based Graphics, Block diagram
The Integrated Graphics Controller provides the following functions:
■ Rapid pixel and texel rendering using special pipelines that allow 2D and 3D operations to overlap, speeding up visual effects, reducing the amount of memory for texture storage.
■ Zone rendering for optimizing 3D drawing, eliminating the need for local graphics memory by reducing the bandwidth.
■ Dynamic video memory allocation, where the amount of memory required by the application is acquired (or released) by the controller.
■ Intelligent memory management allowing tiled memory addressing, deep display buffering, and dynamic data management.
■ Provides two serial digital video out (SDVO) channels for use by an appropriate ADD2 accessory card.
6-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
■
■
The graphics controller integrated into the 82915G/GV GMCH component includes 2D and 3D accelerator engines working with a deeply-pipelined pre-processor. Hardware cursor and overlay generators are also included as well as a legacy VGA processor core. The IGC supports three display devices:
One progressive-scan analog monitor
Up to two additional video displays with the installation of an optional Advanced Digital
Display (ADD2) card in the PCI Express x16 graphics slot.
✎
The IGC can support LVDS, TMDS, or TV output with the proper encoder option.
Special features of the integrated graphics controller include:
■
■
■
■
■
333-MHz core engine
400-MHz 24-bit RAMDAC
2D engine supporting GDI+, alpha stretch blithering, and color space conversion
3D engine supporting Z-bias and up to 1600 x 1200 w/32-bit color @ 85 hz refresh
Video DVD support:
The Intel graphics controller uses a portion of system memory for instructions, textures, and frame (display) buffering. Using a process called Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT), the controller dynamically allocates display and texture memory amounts according to the needs of the application running on the system.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-3
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
6.2.1 Video Memory Allocation Reporting
The IGC does not have local memory at its disposal but instead uses a portion of system memory allocated for frame buffering and texturing. The total memory allocation is determined by the amount of system memory installed in a system. The video BIOS pre-allocates 8 megabytes of memory during POST. System memory that is pre-allocated is not seen by the operating system, which will report the total amount of memory installed less the amount of pre-allocated memory.
Example: A system with 128 MB of SDRAM with the video BIOS set to 8 MB will be reported by MS Windows as having 120 MB.
The IGC will use, in standard VGA/SVGA modes, pre-allocated memory as a true dedicated frame buffer. If the system boots with the OS loading the IGC Extreme Graphics drivers, the pre-allocated memory will then be re-claimed by the drivers and may or may not be used by the
IGC in the “extended” graphic modes. However, it is important to note that pre-allocated memory is available only to the IGC, not to the OS.
The 915G's DVMT function is an enhancement over the Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) of earlier copyists. The DVMT of the 915G selects, during the boot process, the maximum graphics memory allocation possible according on the amount of system memory installed:
SDRAM Installed
128 to 256 megabytes
257 to 511 megabytes
> 512megabytes
Maximum Memory Allocation
8-32 MB
8-64 MB
8-128 MB
The actual amount of system memory used by the IGC (in the “extended” or “extreme” modes) will increase and decrease dynamically according to the needs of the graphics application. The amount of memory used solely for graphics (video) may be reported in a message on the screen, depending on the operating system and/or applications running on the machine.
For viewing the maximum amount of available frame buffer memory MS Windows 2000 or XP, go to Display Properties > Settings> Adapter.
The Microsoft Direct diagnostic tool included in most versions of Windows may be used to check the amount of video memory being used. The Display tab of the utility the “Approx. Total
Memory” label will indicate the amount of video memory. The value will vary according to OS
(Windows 98 will typically show 0.5 to 5 MB or higher, depending on screen resolution and application. In Windows 2000 or XP, the video memory size reported by DirectX will always be
32 MB, even if the total memory installed is over 128 MB.
✎
Some applications, particularly games that require advanced 3D hardware acceleration, may not install or run correectly on systems using the IGC.
6-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
■
■
■
The IGC supports most standard display modes for 2D video displays up to and including 2048 x
1536 @ 85 Hz , and 3D display modes up to 1600 x 1200 @ 85 Hz. The highest resolution available will be determined by the following factors:
Memory speed and amount
Single or dual channel memory
Number and type of monitors
✎
The IGC is designed for optimum performance with multi-sync analog monitors.
Digital displays may not provide an image as high in quality, depending on resolution.
The IGC of SFF, ST, MT, and CMT systems is upgradeable by installing an Advanced Digital
Display 2 (ADD2) or a graphics controller card into the PCI Express x16 graphics slot. All systems can be upgraded by installing a PCI card in the PCI 2.3 slot (assuming no riser cards are installed). Depending on accessory, upgrading through the PCI Express x16 slot can provide digital monitor support and/or dual-monitor support allowing display-cloning or extended desktop functionality. Software drivers may need to be downloaded for specific cards.
✎
Two SDVO channels are provided by the IGC for supporting two digital displays. Existing option cards and drivers support one CRT and digital display. Dual digital display support may be possible with future cards and drivers.
The upgrade procedure is as follows:
1. Shut down the system through the operating system.
2. Unplug the power cord from the rear of the system unit.
3. Remove the chassis cover.
4. Install the graphics card into the PCI Express x16 graphics or PCI 2.3 slot.
5. Replace the chassis cover.
6. Reconnect the power cord to the system unit.
7. Power up the system unit.
The BIOS will detect the presence of the PCI card and disable the IGC of the 82915G GMCH.
✎
.If a PCI 2.3 graphics card is installed, the IGC can be re-enabled through the Setup Utility (F10) but may require driver installation. If a PCI-E graphics controller card is installed, the IGC cannot be enabled.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 6-5
Integrated Graphics Subsystem
These systems includes a standard VGA connector (Figure 6-3) for attaching an analog monitor:
9
Figure 6 3. VGA Monitor Connector, (Female DB-15, as viewed from rear).
5
6
3
4
7
8
Pin Signal
1
2
R
G
B
NC
GND
R GND
G GND
B GND
Table 6-1.
DB-15 Monitor Connector Pinout
Description
Red Analog
Blue Analog
Green Analog
Not Connected
Ground
Red Analog Ground
Blue Analog Ground
Green Analog Ground
Pin
9
15
--
Signal
PWR
10 GND
11 NC
12 SDA
13 HSync
14 VSync
SCL
--
NOTES:
[1] Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed.
Description
+5 VDC (fused) [1]
Ground
Not Connected
DDC2-B Data
Horizontal Sync
Vertical Sync
DDC2-B Clock
--
6-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
7
Power and Signal Distribution
7.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the power supply and method of general power and signal distribution.
Topics covered in this chapter include:
■
■
■
Power supply assembly/control (7.2), page 7-1
Power distribution (7.3), page 7-8
Signal distribution (7.4), page 7-13
7.2 Power Supply Assembly/Control
These systems feature a power supply assembly that is controlled through programmable logic
(Figure 7-1).
System Board
Front Bezel
Power Button
Power On
CPU, slots, Chipsets, Logic,
& Voltage Regulators
PS On
Fan
Spd
+3.3 VDC +5 VDC +12 VDC +12 VccP -12 VDC
+3.3 VDC
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
110 VAC
AC Select [1]
220 VAC
NOTE:
[1] 300-watt power supply only.
Power Supply
Assembly
Figure 7-1. Power Distribution and Control, Block Diagram
Drives
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-1
Power and Signal Distribution
7.2.1 Power Supply Assembly
These systems feature power supplies with power factor-correction logic. Four power supplies are used: a 200-watt power supply for the USDT unit, a 240-watt power supply for the SFF and
ST units, a 300-watt power supply for the MT unit, and a 340-watt power supply for the CMT unit. All power supplies except that for the MT feature active power factor correction (PFC) and auto-ranging. The 300-watt power supply uses passive PFC and an AC select switch. Tables 7-1 through 7-4 list the specifications of the power supplies. Note that output load voltages are measured at the load-side of the output connectors.
Table 7-1.
200-Watt (USDT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications
Range or
Tolerance
Input Line Voltage:
115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–264 VAC
Line Frequency
Input (AC) Current
+3.33 VDC Output
+5.08 VDC Output
47–63 Hz
--
+ 4 %
+ 3.3 %
+5.08 AUX Output
+12 VDC Output [3]
-12 VDC Output
+ 3.3 %
+ 5 %
+ 10 %
Min.
Current
Loading [1]
--
--
--
0.1 A
0.3 A
0.0 A
0.1 A
0.0 A
Max.
Current
--
--
4.0 A
12.0 A
10.0 A
2.0 A
15.5 A
0.15 A
Surge
Current [2]
--
--
--
12.0 A
10.0 A
2.0 A
18.0 A
0.15 A
Max.
Ripple
--
--
--
50 mV
50 mV
50 mV
120 mV
200 mV
NOTES:
Total continuous power should not exceed 200 watts. Total surge power (<10 seconds w/duty cycle < 5 %) should not exceed
230 watts.
[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.
[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance at +/- 10%.
[3] +12 VDC output can be split by the system board to +12 VDC (@ 3 A) and +12 Vcpu (@ 12.5 A) power planes.
Table 7-2.
240-Watt (SFF/ST) Power Supply Assembly Specifications
Range/
Tolerance
Input Line Voltage:
115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–264 VAC
Line Frequency 47–63 Hz
Input (AC) Current
+3.3 VDC Output
+5.08 VDC Output
+5.08 AUX Output
--
+ 4%
+ 3.3 %
+ 3.3 %
+12 VDC Output
+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)
--12 VDC Output
+ 5 %
+ 5 %
+ 10 %
Min.
Current
Loading [1]
--
--
--
0.1 A
0.3 A
0.0 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.0 A
Max.
Current
--
--
5.0 A
19.0 A
14.0 A
3.0 A
7.5 A
12.5 A
0.15 A
Surge
Current [2]
--
--
--
19.0 A
14.0 A
3.0 A
9.0 A
12.5 A
0.15 A
Max.
Ripple
--
--
--
50 mV
50 mV
50 mV
120 mV
120 mv
200 mV
NOTES:
Total continuous power should not exceed 240 watts. Total surge power (<10 seconds w/duty cycle < 5 %) should not exceed
260 watts.
[1] The minimum current loading figures apply to a PS On start up only.
7-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Table 7-3.
300-Watt (MT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications
Range/
Tolerance
Min.
Current
Loading [1]
Max.
Current
Surge
Current [2]
Input Line Voltage:
115 VAC Setting
230 VAC Setting
Line Frequency
Constant Input (AC) Current
+3.3 VDC Output
+5 VDC Output
+5 AUX Output
+12 VDC Output
+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)
--12 VDC Output
90 - 132 VAC
180 - 264 VAC
47–63 Hz
--
+ 5%
+ 5%
+ 5%
+ 5 %
+ 5 %
+ 10 %
--
--
--
0.1 A
0.3 A
0.0 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.0 A
--
--
8.0 / 4.0A
18.0 A
25.0 A
2.0 A
6.5 A
12.5 A
0.8 A
--
--
--
19.0 A
25.0 A
2.0 A
6.5 A
12.5 A
0.8 A
Max.
Ripple
--
--
--
50 mV
50 mV
50 mV
120 mV
120 mv
200 mV
NOTES:
Total continuous power should not exceed 300 watts. Total continuous power (excluding 5 V aux output) should not exceed 290 watts
[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.
[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance +/- 10%.
Table 7-4 lists the specifications for the 340-watt power supply used in the CMT form factor and in some MT form factors.
Table 7-4.
340-Watt (MT/CMT) Power Supply Assembly Specifications
Range or
Tolerance
Input Line Voltage:
115–230 VAC (auto-ranging) 90–132 VAC
Line Frequency 47–63 Hz
Input (AC) Current
+3.3 VDC Output
+5.08 VDC Output
--
+ 4 %
+ 3.3 %
+5.08 AUX Output
+12 VDC Output
+12 VDC Output (Vcpu)
-12 VDC Output
+ 3.3 %
+ 5 %
+ 5 %
+ 10 %
Min.
Current
Loading [1]
--
--
--
0.10 A
0.30 A
0.00 A
0.20 A
0.00 A
0.00 A
Max.
Current
--
--
6.0 A
24.0 A
19.0 A
3.00 A
12.0 A
12.5 A
0.15 A
Surge
Current [2]
--
--
--
24.0 A
19.0 A
3.00 A
14.5 A
12.5 A
0.15 A
Max.
Ripple
NOTES:
Total continuous output power should no exceed 340 watts. Maximum surge power should not exceed 360 watts. Total continuous power (excluding 5 V aux output) should not exceed 325watts.
Maximum combined power of +5 and +3.3 VDC is 160 watts.
[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance.
[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds with 12-volt tolerance +/- 10%.
--
--
--
50 mV
50 mV
50 mV
120 mV
200 mv
200 mV
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-3
Power and Signal Distribution
7.2.2 Power Control
The power supply assembly is controlled digitally by the PS On signal (Figure 7-1). When PS On is asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is activated and all voltage outputs are produced. When
PS On is de-asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is off and no voltages (except +5 AUX) are generated. Note that the +5 AUX voltages are always produced as long as the system is connected to a live AC source.
Power Button
The PS On signal is typically controlled through the Power Button which, when pressed and released, applies a negative (grounding) pulse to the power control logic. The resultant action of pressing the power button depends on the state and mode of the system at that time and is described as follows:
System State
Off
On, ACPI Disabled
On, ACPI Enabled
Pressed Power Button Results In:
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge results in power control logic asserting PS On signal to Power Supply Assembly, which then initializes. ACPI four-second counter is not active.
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to de-assert the PS On signal. ACPI four-second counter is not active.
Pressed and Released Under Four Seconds:
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to generate SMI-, set a bit in the SMI source register, set a bit for button status, and start four-second counter. Software should clear the button status bit within four seconds and the Suspend state is entered. If the status bit is not cleared by software in four seconds PS On is de-asserted and the power supply assembly shuts down (this operation is meant as a guard if the OS is hung).
Pressed and Held At least Four Seconds Before Release:
If the button is held in for at least four seconds and then released, PS On is negated, de-activating the power supply.
7-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Power LED Indications
A dual-color LED located on the front panel (bezel) is used to indicate system power status. The front panel (bezel) power LED provides a visual indication of key system conditions listed as follows:
Power LED
Steady green
Blinks green @ 0.5 Hz
Blinks red 2 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 3 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Bli nks red 4 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 5 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 6 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 7 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 8 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 9 times @ 1 Hz [1]
Blinks red 10 times @ 1 Hz [1]
No light
Condition
Normal full-on operation
Suspend state (S1) or suspend to RAM (S3)
Processor thermal shut down. Check air flow, fan operation, and CPU heat sink.
Processor not installed. Install or reseat CPU.
Power failure (power supply is overloaded). Check voltage selector (if applicable), stroage devices, expansion cards and/or system board.
Pre-video memory error. Incompatible or incorrectly seated
DIMM.
Pre-video graphics error. On system with integrated graphics, check/replace system board. On system with graphics card, check/replace graphics card.
PCA failure. Check/replace system board.
Invalid ROM (checksum error). Reflash ROM using
ROMPaq diskette or replace system board.
System powers on but fails to boot. Check power supply,
CPU, system board.
Bad option card.
System dead. Press and hold power button for less than 4 seconds. If HD LED turns green then check voltage select switch setting or expansion cards. If no LED light then check power button/power supply cables to system board or system board.
NOTE:
[1] Will be accompanied by the same number of beeps, with 2-second pause between cycles. Beeps stop after 5 cycles.
Wake Up Events
The PS On signal can be activated with a power “wake-up” of the system due to the occurrence of a magic packet, serial port ring, or PCI power management (PME) event. These events can be individually enabled through the Setup utility to wake up the system from a sleep (low power) state.
✎
Wake-up functionality requires that certain circuits receive auxiliary power while the system is turned off. The system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet for wake up events to function.
Using an AC power strip to control system unit power will disable wake-up event functionality.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-5
Power and Signal Distribution
The wake up sequence for each event occurs as follows:
Wake-On-LAN
The network interface controller (NIC) can be configured for detection of a “Magic Packet” and wake the system up from sleep mode through the assertion of the PME- signal on the PCI bus.
Refer to Chapter 5, “Network Support” for more information.
Modem Ring
A ring condition on a serial port can be detected by the power control logic and, if so configured, cause the PS On signal to be asserted.
Power Management Event
A power management event that asserts the PME- signal on the PCI bus can be enabled to cause the power control logic to generate the PS On. Note that the PCI card must be PCI ver. 2.2 compliant to support this function.
7-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
7.2.3 Power Management
■
■
■
These systems include power management functions designed to conserve energy. These functions are provided by a combination of hardware, firmware (BIOS) and software. The system provides the following power management features:
ACPI v1.0b compliant (ACPI modes C1, C2, S1, and S3, )
APM 1.2 compliant
U.S. EPA Energy Star compliant
Table 7-5 shows the comparison in power states.
Table 7-5.
System Power States
Power
State System Condition
G0, S0, D0 System fully on. OS and application is running, all components.
G1, S1, C1, D1 System on, CPU is executing and data is held in memory. Some peripheral subsystems may be on low power. Monitor is blanked.
G1, S2/3, C2,
D2 (Standby/or suspend)
G1, S4, D3
(Hibernation)
System on, CPU not executing, cache data lost. Memory is holding data, display and I/O subsystems on low power.
System off. CPU, memory, and most subsystems shut down.
Memory image saved to disk for recall on power up.
G2, S5, D3 cold
G3
System off. All components either completely shut down or receiving minimum power to perform system wake-up.
System off (mechanical). No power to any internal components except
RTC circuit. [1]
Power
Consumption
Maximum
Low
Low
Low
Minimum
None
Transition
To S0 by [2]
N/A
<35 sec. after power button action
NOTES:
Gn = Global state.
Sn = Sleep state.
Cn = ACPI state.
Dn = PCI state.
[1] Power cord is disconnected for this condition.
[2] Actual transition time dependent on OS and/or application software.
< 2 sec after keyboard or pointing device action
< 5 sec. after keyboard, pointing device, or power button action
<25 sec. after power button action
—
OS Restart
Required
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
—
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-7
Power and Signal Distribution
7.3.1 3.3/5/12 VDC Distribution
The power supply assembly includes a multi-connector cable assembly that routes +3.3 VDC, +5
VDC, +5 VDC STB, +12 VC, and -12 VDC to the system board as well as to the individual drive assemblies. Figure 7-2 shows the power supply cabling for the Ultra Slim Desktop form factor.
P3
P2
P2
5 4 3 2 1
P3
Power Supply
351455
P1
P1
13 24
Conn
P1
P1 [1]
P2
P3
Pin 1
+5 aux
+12
+3.3
RTN
Pin 2
RTN
+5 sns
RTN
RTN
Pin 3
+ 5
RTN
+5
RTN
NOTES:
Connectors not shown to scale.
All + and – values are VDC.
RTN = Return (signal ground) sns = sense
GND = Power ground
RS = Remote sense
FO = Fan off
FSpd = Fan speed
FS = Fan Sink
FC = Fan Command
Vccp = +12 VDC for CPU
[1] This row represents pins 13 – 24 of connector P1.
1
Pin 4
+5
+5
RTN
VccP
Pin 5
PS On
+5
+12
VccP
Pin 6
RTN
+3.3
Pin 7
Pwr Gd
RTN
Pin 8
+3.3
+3.3 sns
Pin 9
+3.3
+3.3
Pin
10
Tach
+3.3
+12
12
Pin
11
RTN
RTN
Pin
12
Fan
-12
Figure 7-2. USDT Power Cable Diagram
7-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Figure 7-3 shows the power supply cabling for the SFF/ST systems.
Power Supply
349318
P5 P6
P4
P3
P2
P1
P6
1 2 3 4
P4, P5
5 4 3 2 1
P2
13
4 3 2 1
P1
P3
24
1
12
Conn
P1
P1 [1]
P2
P3
P4, 5
P6
Pin 1
+5 aux
+12
+5
RTN
+3.3
+12
Pin 2
RTN
+5 sns
RTN
RTN
RTN
RTN
Pin 3
+ 5
RTN
RTN
RTN
+5
RTN
Pin 4
+5
+5
+12
VccP
RTN
+5
Connectors not shown to scale.
All + and - values are VDC.
RTN = Return (signal ground) sns = sense
GND = Power ground
RS = Remote sense
FC = Fan command
FO = Fan off
FSpd = Fan speed
FS = Fan Sink
POK = Power OK (power good)
VccP = +12 for CPU
[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1
Pin 5
PS On
+5
VccP
+12
Pin 6
RTN
+3.3
Pin 7
Pwr Gd
RTN
Pin 8
+3.3
+3.3 sns
Pin 9
+3.3
+3.3
Pin
10
Tach
+3.3
+12
Pin
11
RTN
RTN
Pin
12
Fan
-12
Figure 7-3. SFF/ST Power Cable Diagram
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-9
Power and Signal Distribution
Figure 7-4 shows the power supply cabling for the microtower systems.
Power Supply
366307
P4 P9 P5 P10 P6
P7
P2 P3 P8
P1
1
P8
P9, P10
5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
P7
2 4
1 3
13
1 2 3 4
P1
24
12
Conn
P1
P1 [1]
P2-6
P7
P8
P9, 10
Pin 1
+3.3RS
+3.3
+12
RTN
+5
+3.3
Pin 2
+3.3
-12
RTN
RTN
RTN
RTN
Pin 3
RTN
RTN
RTN
+12
RTN
+5
Pin 4
+5
PS On
+5
+12
+12
RTN
Pin 5
RTN
RTN
+12
Pin 6 Pin 7
+5
RTN
RTN
RTN
NOTES:
Connectors not shown to scale.
All + and - values are VDC.
RTN = Return (signal ground)
GND = Power ground
RS = Remote sense
POK = Power ok (power good)
FC = Fan Command
[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1.
Figure 7-4. MT Power Cable Diagram
Pin 8 Pin 9
POK
Open
5 aux
+5
Pin
10
+12
+5
Pin
11
+12
+5
Pin
12
+3.3
RTN
7-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Figure 7-4 shows the power supply cabling for the convertible minitower systems.
Power Supply
349774
P9 P10 P11
P6 P7 P8
P4 P5
P3
P1
1
P4, P5, P9, P10
5 4 3 2 1
P8
4 3 2 1
P6, P7, P11
2
P3
4
13
1 2 3 4
P1
1 3
24
12
Conn
P1
P1 [1]
P3
P4, 5,
9, 10
P6, 7,
11
P8
Pin 1
+3.3
RS
RTN
+3.3
+12
+5
Pin 2
+3.3
-12
RTN
RTN
RTN
RTN
Pin 3
RTN
RTN
VccP
+5.08
RTN
RTN
Pin 4
+5
PS On
VccP
RTN
Pin 5
RTN
RTN
+12
+5
+12
Pin 6 Pin 7
+5
RTN
RTN
RTN
NOTES:
Connectors not shown to scale.
All + and - values are VDC.
RTN = Return (signal ground)
GND = Power ground
RS = Remote sense
POK = Power ok (power good)
FC = Fan Command
[1] This row represents pins 13–24 of connector P1.
Figure 7-5. CMT Power Cable Diagram
Pin 8 Pin 9
POK
Open
5 aux
+5
Pin
10
+12
+5
Pin
11
+12
+5
Pin
12
+3.3
RTN
✎
The 340-watt power supply is also used on some MT SKUs..
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-11
Power and Signal Distribution
7.3.2 Low Voltage Production/Distribution
Auxiliary voltages less than 5 volts and all voltages less than 3.3 volts are produced through regulator circuitry (Figure 7-6) on the system board.
Power Supply
5 Aux
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Processor
Aux
PWR
3.3 Aux
3.3 VDC
1.5 V
Regulator
DDR
PWR
2.5 VDC
1.5 VDC
1.5 VDC
DIMMs
DIMMs
DIMMs
Chipset
5 VDC
12 VDC
VID 0-5
Regulator
Circuit
VccP
1.2 VDC
Processor
Processor
Figure 7-6. Low Voltage Supply and Distribution Diagram
The VccP regulator produces the VccP (processor core) voltage according to the strapping of signals VID0..5 by the processor and may range from 0.8375 to 1.6 VDC.
7-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Figures 7-7 through 7-9 show general signal distribution between the main subassemblies of the system units.
Chassis Fan
Speaker
Power On
Power LED HD LED
P8 P6
P5
P3
P1
+12 VccP
+3.3, +5, +12 VDC
PS On, POK
Power
Supply
Assembly
System
Board
356023-001
P60
IDE I/F
P21
IDE I/F.,
Diskette I/F.,
CD Audio
SATA
Hard Drive
J66
Kybd data
Mouse data
J67
Mic In, HP Out
Audio
P23
USB 6,7 Tx/Rx
P24
MultiBay
Daughter
Board
Keyboard
Mouse
Front
Panel
I/O Module
CD, DVD, or
Diskette Drive
NOTES:
See Figure 7-10 for header pinout.
Figure 7-7. USDT Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-13
Power and Signal Distribution
Chassis Fan
Speaker
Power On
Power LED
P8 P6
P5
P3
P1
+12 VccP
+3.3, +5, +12 VDC
PS On, POK
Power
Supply
Assembly
Diskette
P10
Diskette I/F
HD LED
System
Board
356033-001
P60
IDE I/F
P20
IDE I/F
SATA
Hard Drive
CD-ROM
J66
Kybd data
Mouse data
J67
Mic In, HP Out
Audio
P23
USB 6,7 Tx/Rx
P24
Keyboard
Mouse
Front
Panel
I/O Module
NOTES:
See Figure 7-7 for header pinout.
Figure 7-8. SFF / ST Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram
7-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Power and Signal Distribution
Chassis Fan
Speaker
Power On
Power LED
P8 P6
P5
P3
P1
+12 VccP
+3.3, +5, +12 VDC
PS On, POK
Power
Supply
Assembly
Diskette
P10
Diskette I/F
HD LED
System
Board xxxxxx-001
P60
IDE I/F
SATA
Hard Drive
CD-ROM
P20
IDE I/F.
J66
Kybd data
Mouse data
J67
Mic In, HP Out
Audio
P23
USB 6,7 Tx/Rx
P24
J30
PCI 2.3 I/F
PCI Expansion
Daughter Board [1]
Notes:
[1] Applicable to CMT form factor only.
Keyboard
Mouse
Front
Panel
I/O Module
CD Audio
Figure 7-9. MT / CMT Form Factor Signal Distribution Diagram
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 7-15
Power and Signal Distribution
Power Button/LED, HD LED
Header P5 (USDT, SFF, ST)
HD LED Cathode 1
HD LED Anode 3
GND5
Chassis ID0 9
GND 11
Therm Diode A 13
2 PS LED Cathode
4 PS LED Anode
6 Pwr Btn
8 GND
10 Chassis ID1
12 NC
14 Therm Diode C
Power Button/LED, HD LED
Header P5 (MT, CMT)
HD LED Cathode 1
HD LED Anode 3
GND5
M Reset 7
+5 VDC 9
NC 11
GND 13
Chassis ID2 15
Chassis ID0 17
2 PS LED Cathode
4 PS LED Anode
6 Pwr Btn
8 GND
10 NC
12 GND
16 +5 VDC
18 Chassis ID1
CD ROM Audio
1 Audio (Left Channel)
2 Ground
3 Ground
4 Audio (right channel)
Serial Port A
Header P54
UART1 DCD- 1
UART1 RX DATA 3
UART1 TX DATA 5
UART1 DTR 7
GND 9
2 UART1 DSR-
4 UART1 RTS-
6 UART1 CTS-
8 UART1 RI-
10 Comm A Detect-
Serial Port B
Header P52
UART2 DTR- 1
UART2 CTS- 3
UART2 TX DATA 5
GND 7
+5.0V 9
UART2 RTS- 11
UART2 DCD- 13
+12V 15
2 UART2 RX DATA
4 UART2 DSR-
6 UART2 RI-
8 GND
10 +3.3V aux
12 Comm B Detect
14 -12V
Hood Lock
Header P124
Hood Lock 1
GND 5
2 Coil Conn
4 +12V
6 Hood Unlock
Hood Sense
Header P125
1 Hood SW Detect
2 GND
3 Hood Sensor
NOTE:
No polarity consideration required for connection to speaker header P6.
Figure 7-10. Header Pinouts
7-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
8
BIOS ROM
8.1 Introduction
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) of the computer is a collection of machine language programs stored as firmware in read-only memory (ROM). The BIOS ROM includes such functions as Power-On Self Test (POST), PCI device initialization, Plug 'n Play support, power management activities, and the Setup utility. The firmware contained in the BIOS ROM supports the following operating systems and specifications:
DOS 6.2
Windows 3.1 (and Windows for Workgroups 3.11)
Windows 95, 98SE, 2000, XP Professional, and XP Home
Windows NT 4.0 (SP6 required for PnP support)
OS/2 ver 2.1 and OS/2 Warp
SCO Unix
DMI 2.1
Intel Wired for Management (WfM) ver. 2.2
Alert-On-LAN (AOL) and Wake-On-LAN (WOL)
ACPI and OnNow
SMBIOS 2.3.1
PC98/99/00 and NetPC
Intel PXE boot ROM for the integrated LAN controller
BIOS Boot Specification 1.01
Enhanced Disk Drive Specification 3.0
“El Torito” Bootable CD-ROM Format Specification 1.0
ATAPI Removeable Media Device BIOS Specification 1.0
The BIOS ROM is a 512KB Intel Firmware Hub (or Firmware Hub-compatible) part. The runtime portion of the BIOS resides in a 128KB block from E0000h to FFFFFh.
8-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002
BIOS ROM
This chapter includes the following topics:
■
■
■
■
■
■
ROM flashing (8.2), page 8-2
Boot functions (8.3), page 8-3
Setup utility (8.4) , page 8-6
Client management functions (8.5), page 8-17
PnP support (8.6) , page 8-19
USB legacy support (8.7), page 8-20
The system BIOS firmware is contained in a flash ROM device that can be re-written with BIOS code (using the ROMPAQ utility or a remote flash program) allowing easy upgrading, including changing the splash screen displayed during the POST routine.
8.2.1 Upgrading
Upgrading the BIOS is not normally required but may be necessary if changes are made to the unit's operating system, hard drive, or processor. All BIOS ROM upgrades are available directly from HP. Flashing is done either locally with the HP-provided Windows program, a ROMPaq diskette or remotely using the network boot function (described in the section 8.3.2).
This system includes 64 KB of write-protected boot block ROM that provides a way to recover from a failed flashing of the system BIOS ROM. If the BIOS ROM fails the flash check, the boot block code provides the minimum amount of support necessary to allow booting the system from the diskette drive and re-flashing the system ROM with a ROMPAQ diskette. Note that if an administrator password has been set in the system the boot block will prompt for this password by illuminating the caps lock keyboard LED and displaying a message if video support is available. A PS/2 keyboard must be used during bootblock operation.
Since video may not be available during the initial boot sequence the boot block routine uses the
Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock LEDs of the PS/2 keyboard to communicate the status of the ROM flash as follows:
Table 8-1
Boot Block Codes
Num Lock LED Cap Lock LED Scroll Lock LED
Off On Off
Meaning
Administrator password required.
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
Boot failed. Reset required for retry.
Flash failed.
Flash complete.
8-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
8.2.2 Changeable Splash Screen
✎
A corrupted splash screen may be restored by the user with the ROMPAQ software. Depending on the system, changing (customizing) the splash screen may only be available with asistance from HP.
The splash screen (image displayed during POST) is stored in the BIOS ROM and may be replaced with another image of choice by using the Image Flash utility (Flashi.exe). The Image
Flash utility allows the user to browse directories for image searching and pre-viewing.
Background and foreground colors can be chosen from the selected image's palette.
The splash screen image requirements are as follows:
■
■
■
■
Format = Windows bitmap with 4-bit RLE encoding
Size = 424 (width) x 320 (height) pixels
Colors = 16 (4 bits per pixel)
File Size = < 64 KB
The Image Flash utility can be invoked at a command line for quickly flashing a known image as follows:
>\Flashi.exe [Image_Filename] [Background_Color] [Foreground_Color]
The utility checks to insure that the specified image meets the splash screen requirements listed above or it will not be loaded into the ROM.
The BIOS supports various functions related to the boot process, including those that occur during the Power On Self-Test (POST) routine.
8.3.1 Boot Device Order
The default boot device order is as follows:
1. IDE CD-ROM drive (EL Torito CD images)
2. Diskette drive (A:)
3. MultiBay device (A: or CD-ROM) if applicable
4. USB device
5. Hard drive (C:)
6. Network interface controller
The order can be changed in the ROM-based Setup utility (accessed by pressing F10 when so prompted during POST). The options are displayed only if the device is attached, except for USB devices. The USB option is displayed even if no USB storage devices are present. The hot IPL option is available through the F9 utility, which allows the user to select a hot IPL boot device.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-3
BIOS ROM
8.3.2 Network Boot (F12) Support
■
■
■
The BIOS supports booting the system to a network server. The function is accessed by pressing the F12 key when prompted at the lower right hand corner of the display during POST. Booting to a network server allows for such functions as:
Flashing a ROM on a system without a functional operating system (OS).
Installing an OS.
Installing an application.
These systems include, as standard, an integrated Intel 82562-equivalent NIC with Preboot
Execution Environment (PXE) ROM and can boot with a NetPC-compliant server.
8.3.3 Memory Detection and Configuration
■
■
■
■
■
This system uses the Serial Presence Detect (SPD) method of determining the installed DIMM configuration. The BIOS communicates with an EEPROM on each DIMM through the SMBus to obtain data on the following DIMM parameters:
Presence
Size
Type
Timing/CAS latency
PC133 capability
✎
Refer to Chapter 3, “Processor/Memory Subsystem” for the SPD format and DIMM data specific to this system.
The BIOS performs memory detection and configuration with the following steps:
1. Program the buffer strength control registers based on SPD data and the DIMM slots that are populated.
2. Determine the common CAS latency that can be supported by the DIMMs.
3. Determine the memory size for each DIMM and program the GMCH accordingly.
4. Enable refresh
8-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
8.3.4 Boot Error Codes
The BIOS provides visual and audible indications of a failed system boot by using the LEDS on the PS/2 keyboard and the system board speaker. The error conditions are listed in the following table.
Visual [1]
Num Lock LED blinks
Scroll Lock LED blinks
Caps Lock LED blinks
Table 8-2
Boot Error Codes
Audible
1 short, 2 long beeps
2 long, 1 short beeps
1 long, 2 short beeps
Meaning
System memory not present or incompatible.
Hardware failure before graphics initialization.
Graphics controller not present or failed to initialize.
ROM failure.
Num, Caps, Scroll Lock LEDs blink
1 long, 3 short beeps
Num, Caps, Scroll Lock LEDs blink in sequence none Network service mode
NOTE:
[1] Provided with PS/2 keyboard only.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-5
BIOS ROM
8-6
The Setup utility (stored in ROM) allows the user to configure system functions involving security, power management, and system resources. The Setup utility is ROM-based and invoked when the F10 key is pressed and held during the computer boot cycle. Highlights of the Setup utility are described in the following table.
✎
After pressing and releasing the computer’s power button, press and hold the F10 key until the
Setup Utility screen is displayed.
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Heading Option Description
File System Lists:
• Product name
• Processor type/speed/stepping
• Cache size (L1/L2)
• Installed memory size/speed, number of channels (single or dual) (if applicable)
• Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if applicable)
• System ROM (includes family name and version)
• Chassis serial number
• Asset tracking number
About Displays copyright information.
Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date.
Replicated Setup Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted
1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device.
Default Setup
Apply Defaults and Exit
Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any established passwords.
Ignore Changes and Exit
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
Heading
File
(continued)
Option
Save Changes and
Exit
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits
Computer Setup.
Storage Device
Configuration
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are displayed. The following options may be presented.
Diskette Type
Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette drive.
Legacy Diskette Drives
Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB and
5.25" 1.2 MB.
Drive Emulation
Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage device. (For example, a Zip drive can be made bootable by selecting diskette emulation.)
Drive Type
ATAPI Zip drive
ATA Hard disk
Emulation Options
None (treated as Other)
Diskette (treated as diskette drive)
None (treated as Other)
Legacy diskette
CD-ROM drive
ATAPI LS-120
Disk (treated as hard drive)
No emulation options available
No emulation options available
None (treated as Other).
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).
Default Values IDE/SATA
Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)
Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector PIO operation. Options (subject to device capabilities) are Disabled, 8, and 16.
Ä
CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not be changed. If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be inaccessible.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-7
BIOS ROM
Heading Option
Storage Options
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)
✎
This feature appears only when User translation mode is selected.
Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate disk I/O requests
(from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard drive can accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may not exceed 256. The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63. These fields are only visible and changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User.
Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.
Legacy Diskette Write
Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.
✎
After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer will restart. Turn the computer off, then on, manually.
BIOS DMA Data Transfers
Allows you to control how BIOS disk I/O requests are serviced.
When “Enable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA disk read and write requests with DMA data transfers. When “Disable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA disk read and write requests with PIO data transfers.
SATA Emulation
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are accessed by the operating system.
“Separate IDE Controller” is the default option. Up to 4 SATA and 2
PATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA controllers appear as two separate IDE controllers. Use this option with Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
• SATA 0 is seen as SATA Primary Device 0
• SATA 1 (if present) is seen as SATA Secondary Device 0
“Combined IDE Controller” is the other option. Up to 2 PATA and 2
SATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA controllers appear as one combined IDE controller. Use this option with Microsoft Windows 98 and earlier operating systems.
• PATA Primary Device 0 replaces SATA 1
• PATA Primary Device 1 replaces SATA 3
IDE Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the primary IDE controller. This feature is supported on select models only.
Primary SATA Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the Primary SATA controller.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
8-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
Heading
Storage
(continued)
Option
DPS Self-Test
Boot Order
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Secondary SATA Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the Secondary SATA controller. This feature is supported on select models only.
Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of performing the Drive Protection System (DPS) self-tests.
✎
This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the DPS self-tests is attached to the system.
Allows you to:
• Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB flash media device, diskette drive, hard drive, optical drive, or network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating system image. Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable operating system source.
• Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in the order will have priority in the boot sequence and will be recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).
✎
MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non-MS-DOS operating system has started.
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order, restart the computer and press F9 when the monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred bootable device and press Enter. The computer then boots from the selected non-default device for this one time.
Security Setup Password
Power-On
Password
Allows you to set and enables setup (administrator) password.
✎
If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer
Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
See the Troubleshooting Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.
Allows you to set and enable power-on password.
See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information.
Password Options
(This selection will appear only if a power-on password is set.)
Allows you to specify whether the password is required for warm boot (CTRL+ALT+DEL).
See the Desktop Management Guide for more information.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-9
BIOS ROM
Heading
Security
(continued)
Option
Smart Cover
Embedded
Security
Device Security
Network Service
Boot
System IDs
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Allows you to:
• Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
• Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup
Password.
✎
Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on select models only. See the Desktop
Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.
Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.
This feature is supported on select models only. See the Desktop
Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.
Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports, system audio, network controllers (some models), MultiBay devices (some models), SMBus controller (some models), and SCSI controllers
(some models).
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network server. (Feature available on NIC models only; the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system board.)
Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte identifier displayed during POST).
See the Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for
System ID entry.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
8-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
Heading
Security
(continued)
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Option Description
DriveLock Security Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for
MultiBay hard drives. When this feature is enabled, the user is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
✎
This selection will only appear when at least one MultiBay drive that supports the DriveLock feature is attached to the system.
See the Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation CD for more information.
Data Execution
Prevention
Master Boot
Record Security*
Enable/Disable.
Data Execution Prevention Mode help prevent OS security breaches.
✎
This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating system being used comprehend and utilize the function.
Allows you to enable or disable Master Boot Record (MBR) Security.
When enabled, the BIOS rejects all requests to write to the MBR on the current bootable disk. Each time the computer is powered on or rebooted, the BIOS compares the MBR of the bootable disk to the previously saved MBR. If changes are detected, you are given the option of saving the MBR on the current bootable disk, restoring the previously-saved MBR, or disabling MBR security. You must know the setup password if one is set.
✎
Disable MBR Security before intentionally changing the formatting or partitioning of the current bootable disk. Several disk utilities
(such as FDISK and FORMAT) attempt to update the MBR.
If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the BIOS, write requests to the MBR are rejected, causing the utilities to report errors.
If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the operating system, any MBR change will be detected by the
BIOS during the next reboot, and an MBR Security warning message will be displayed.
Save Master Boot
Record*
Saves a backup copy of the Master Boot Record of the current bootable disk.
✎
Only appears if MBR Security is enabled.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-11
BIOS ROM
Heading Option
Restore Master
Boot Record*
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Restores the backup Master Boot Record to the current bootable disk.
✎
Only appears if all of the following conditions are true:
MBR Security is enabled.
A backup copy of the MBR has been previously saved.
The current bootable disk is the same disk from which the backup copy of the MBR was saved.
Ä
CAUTION: Restoring a previously saved MBR after a disk utility or operating system has modified the MBR may cause the data on the disk to become inaccessible. Only restore a previously saved
MBR ifyou are confident that the current bootable disk’s MBR has been corrupted or infected with a virus.
Power OS Power
Management
• Runtime Power Management - Enable/Disable. Allows certain operating systems to reduce processor voltage and frequency when the current software load does not require the full capabilities of the processor.
• Idle Power Savings - Extended/Normal. Allows certain operating systems to decrease the processors power consumption when the processor is idle.
• ACPI S3 Support - Enables or disables ACPI S3 support.
• ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset - Enabling this causes the BIOS to ensure hard disks are ready to accept commands after resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating system.
• ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup - Enables or disables waking from
S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.
SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or device power management.
Hardware Power
Management
Thermal Fan idle mode - This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan speed.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
8-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Heading Option Description
Advanced*
*For advanced users only
Power-On Options Allows you to set:
• POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1-30 days).
• POST messages (enable/disable).
• F9 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F9=Boot Menu during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F9 will still access the Shortcut Boot (Order) Menu screen. See Storage >
Boot Order for more information.
• F10 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F10=Setup during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F10 will still access the Setup screen.
• F12 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display the text F12=Network Service Boot during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F12 will still force the system to attempt booting from the network.
• Option ROM* prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will cause the system to display a message before loading options ROMs. (This feature is supported on select models only.)
• Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).
• After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): After power loss, if you connect your computer to an electric power strip and would like to turn on power to the computer using the switch on the power strip, set this option to ON.
✎
If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a power strip, you will not be able to use the suspend/sleep feature or the Remote Management features.
• POST Delay (in seconds) (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified delay to the POST process. This delay is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very slowly; so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The POST delay also gives you more time to press F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup.
• I/O APIC Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will allow Microsoft Windows Operating Systems to run optimally.
This feature must be disabled for certain non-Microsoft
Operating Systems to work properly.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-13
BIOS ROM
Heading
Advanced*
(continued)
*For advanced users only
Option
Power-On Options
(continued)
BIOS Power-On
Onboard Devices
PCI Devices
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Allows you to set: (continued)
• ACPI/USB Buffers @ Top of Memory (enable/disable).
Enabling this feature places USB memory buffers at the top of memory. The advantage is that some amount of memory below 1 MB is freed up for use by option ROMs. The disadvantage is that a popular memory manager, HIMEM.SYS, does not work properly when USB buffers are at top of memory
AND the system has 64 MB or less of RAM.
• Hyper-threading (enable/disable).
• Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3 - Restricts the number of
CPUID functions reported by the microprocessor. Enable this feature if booting to WinNT.
Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you specify.
Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices
(diskette controller, serial port, or parallel port).
• Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.
• Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to disable them entirely. These settings have no effect under an
APIC-based operating system.
Bus Options* On select models, allows you to enable or disable:
• PCI SERR# Generation.
• PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration space; only needed when more than one graphics controller is installed.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
8-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
Heading
Advanced*
(continued)
*For advanced users only
Option
Device options
Table 8-3
Setup Utility
Description
Allows you to set:
• Printer mode (bi-directional, EPP & ECP, output only).
• Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).
• S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).
• To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow
(left and right) keys to select the Advanced > Device Options menu and set the S5 Wake on Lan feature to “Disable.” This obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer during S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on
LAN from suspend or hibernation, but will prevent it from waking from S5 via the network. It does not affect operation of the network connection while the computer is on.
• If a network connection is not required, completely disable the network controller (NIC) by using the arrow (left and right) keys to select the Security > Device Security menu. Set the Network
Controller option to “Device Hidden.” This prevents the network controller from being used by the operating system and reduces the power used by the computer in S5.
• Processor cache (enable/disable).
• Unique Sleep State Blink Patterns. Allows you to choose an LED blink pattern that uniquely identifies each sleep state.
• Integrated Video (enable/disable) Allows you to use integrated video and PCI Up Solution video at the same time (available on select models only).
✎
Inserting a PCI or PCI Express video card automatically disables
Integrated Video. When PCI Express video is on, Integrated
Video must remain disabled.
• Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows ROM to save monitor asset information.
Allows you to set:
• NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS contains an embedded NIC option ROM to allow the unit to boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC option ROM takes up memory space below 1MB commonly referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the downloading of this embedded NIC option ROM thus giving more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option
ROM enabled.
PCI VGA
Configuration
Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the
“boot” or primary VGA controller.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-15
BIOS ROM
8.5 Client Management Functions
Table 8-4 provides a partial list of the client management BIOS functions supported by the systems covered in this guide. These functions, designed to support intelligent manageability applications, are Compaq-specific unless otherwise indicated.
Table 8-4.
Client Management Functions (INT15)
AX
E800h
E813h
E814h
E816h
E817h
E818h
Function
Get system ID
Get monitor data
Get system revision
Get temperature status
Get drive attribute
Get drive off-line test
E819h Get chassis serial number
E820h [1] Get system memory map
E81Ah
E81Bh
Write chassis serial number
Get hard drive threshold
E81Eh
E827h
Get hard drive ID
DIMM EEPROM Access
Mode
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real
Real
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
NOTE:
[1] Industry standard function.
All 32-bit protected-mode functions are accessed by using the industry-standard BIOS32 Service
Directory. Using the service directory involves three steps:
1. Locating the service directory.
2. Using the service directory to obtain the entry point for the client management functions.
3. Calling the client management service to perform the desired function.
The BIOS32 Service Directory is a 16-byte block that begins on a 16-byte boundary between the physical address range of 0E0000h-0FFFFFh.
The following subsections provide a brief description of key Client Management functions.
8-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
8.5.1 System ID and ROM Type
Diagnostic applications can use the INT 15, AX=E800h BIOS function to identify the type of system. This function will return the system ID in the BX register. systems have the following
IDs and ROM family types:
Table 8-5
System ID
System (Form Factor) System ID
USDT 0980h
SFF/ ST:
DDR
DDR2
097Ch
09D0h uT:
DDR
DDR2
0984h
09CCh
CMT:
DDR
DDR2
0968h
09C8h
NOTE: All systems use BIOS ROM Family 786C1 and PnP ID CPQ0968.
The ROM family and version numbers can be verified with the Setup utility or the Compaq
Insight Manager or Diagnostics applications.
8.5.2 Temperature Status
The BIOS includes a function (INT15, AX=E816h) to retrieve the status of a system's interior temperature. This function allows an application to check whether the temperature situation is at a Normal, Caution, or Critical condition.
8.5.3 Drive Fault Prediction
The BIOS directly supports Drive Fault Prediction for IDE (ATA)-type hard drives. This feature is provided through two Client Management BIOS calls. Function INT 15, AX=E817h is used to retrieve a 512-byte block of drive attribute data while the INT 15, AX=E81Bh is used to retrieve the drive's warranty threshold data. If data is returned indicating possible failure then the following message is displayed:
1720-SMART Hard Drive detects imminent failure
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-17
BIOS ROM
The BIOS includes Plug 'n Play (PnP) support for PnP version 1.0A. Table 8-6 lists the PnP functions supported.
Table 8-6.
PnP BIOS Functions
Function
00h
01h
Register
Get number of system device nodes
Get system device node
02h
03h
04h
50h
51h
Set system device node
Get event
Send message
Get SMBIOS Structure Information
Get Specific SMBIOS Structure
The BIOS call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h can be used by an application to retrieve the default settings of PnP devices for the user. The application should use the following steps for the display function:
1. Call PnP function 01(get System Device Node) for each devnode with bit 1 of the control flag set (get static configuration) and save the results.
2. Call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h.
3. Call PnP “Get Static Configuration” for each devnode and display the defaults.
4. If the user chooses to save the configuration, no further action is required. The system board devices will be configured at the next boot. If the user wants to abandon the changes, then the application must call PnP function 02 (Set System Device Node) for each devnode (with bit
1 of the control flag set for static configuration) with the results from the calls made prior to invoking this function.
8-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
BIOS ROM
8.6.1 SMBIOS
In support of the DMI specification the PnP functions 50h and 51h are used to retrieve the
SMBIOS data. Function 50h retrieves the number of structures, size of the largest structure, and
SMBIOS version. Function 51h retrieves a specific structure. This system supports SMBIOS version 2.3.1 and the following structure types:
17
19
20
31
9
13
15
16
32
128
7
8
3
4
Type
0
1
Data
BIOS Information
System Information
System Enclosure or Chassis
Processor Information
Cache Information
Port Connector Information
System Slots
BIOS Language Information
System Event Log Information
Physical Memory Array
Memory Devices
Memory Array Mapped Addresses
Memory Device Mapped Addresses
Boot Integrity Service Entry Point
System Boot Information
OEM Defined Structure with Intel Alert-On-LAN (AOL)
Information
✎
System information on these systems is handled exclusively through the SMBIOS.
8.7 USB Legacy Support
The BIOS ROM checks the USB port, during POST, for the presence of a USB keyboard. This allows a system with only a USB keyboard to be used during ROM-based setup and also on a system with an OS that does not include a USB driver.
On such a system a keystroke will generate an SMI and the SMI handler will retrieve the data from the device and convert it to PS/2 data. The data will be passed to the keyboard controller and processed as in the PS/2 interface. Changing the delay and/or typematic rate of a USB keyboard though BIOS function INT 16 is not supported.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 8-19
BIOS ROM
8-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
A
Error Messages and Codes
A.1 Introduction
This appendix lists the error codes and a brief description of the probable cause of the error.
✎
Errors listed in this appendix are applicable only for systems running HP/Compaq BIOS.
Not all errors listed in this appendix may be applicable to a particular system model and/or configuration.
A.2 Beep/Keyboard LED Codes
✎
Beep and LED indictions listed in Table A-1 apply only to HP-branded models.
Beeps
1 short, 2 long
1 long, 2 short
2 long, 1 short
1 long, 3 short
None
None
None
None
None
Table A-1.
Beep/Keyboard LED Codes
LED [1]
NUM lock blinking
CAP lock blinking
Scroll lock blinking
(None)
All three blink in sequence
NUM lock steady on
CAP lock steady on
All three blink together
All three steady on
Probable Cause
Base memory failure.
Video/graphics controller failure.
System failure (prior to video initialization).
Boot block executing
Keyboard locked in network mode.
ROMPAQ diskette not present, bad, or drive not ready.
Password prompt.
ROM flash failed.
Successful ROM flash.
NOTES:
[1] PS/2 keyboard only.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-1
Error Messages and Codes
A.3 Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages
Error Message
Table A-2.
Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages
Probable Cause
Invalid Electronic Serial Number Chassis serial number is corrupt. Use Setup to enter a valid number.
Network Server Mode Active (w/o kybd)
System is in network mode.
101-Option ROM Checksum Error A device’s option ROM has failed/is bad.
110-Out of Memory Space for
Option ROMs
102-system Board Failure
150-Safe POST Active
162-System Options Not Set
163-Time & Date Not Set
164-Memory Size Error
201-Memory Error
Recently added PCI card contains and option ROM too large to download during POST.
Failed ESCD write, A20, timer, or DMA controller.
An option ROM failed to execute on a previous boot.
Invalid checksum, RTC lost power, or invalid configuration.
Date and time information in CMOS is not valid.
Memory has been added or removed.
Memory test failed.
213-Incompatible Memory Module BIOS detected installed DIMM(s) as being not compatible.
214-DIM Configuration Warning A specific error has occurred in a memory device installed in the identified socket.
216-Memory Size Exceeds Max Installed memory exceeds the maximum supported by the system.
217-DIMM Configuration Warning Unbalanced memory configuration.
219-ECC Memory Module
Detected ECC Modules not supported on this platform
Recently added memory module(s) support ECC memory error correction.
301-Keyboard Error
303-Keyboard Controller Error
Keyboard interface test failed (improper connection or stuck key).
Keyboard buffer failed empty (8042 failure or stuck key).
304-Keyboard/System Unit Error Keyboard controller failed self-test.
404-Parallel Port Address Conflict Current parallel port address is conflicting with another device.
417-Network Interface Card
Failure
NIC BIOS could not read Device ID of embedded NIC.
501-Display Adapter Failure
510-Splash Image Corrupt
511-CPU Fan Not Detected
Graphics display controller.
Corrupted splash screen image. Restore default image w/ROMPAQ.
Processor heat sink fan is not connected.
A-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
Error Message
512-Chassis Fan Not Detected
Table A-2. (Continued)
Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages
Probable Cause
Chassis fan is not connected.
CPU fan is not connected or may have malfunctioned.
514-CPU or Chassis Fan not detected.
601-Diskette Controller Error
605-Diskette Drive Type Error
Diskette drive removed since previous boot.
Mismatch in drive type.
Cover (hood) removal has been detected by the Smart Cover Sensor.
912-Computer Cover Removed
Since Last System Start Up
914-Hood Lock Coil is not
Connected
Smart Cover Lock mechanism is missing or not connected.
916-Power Button Not Connected Power button harness has been detached or unseated from the system board.
917-Expansion Riser Not Detected Expansion (backplane) board not seated properly.
919-Front Panel, MultiPort, and/or
MultiBay Risers not Detected
Riser card has been removed or has not been reinstalled properly in the system.
1156-Serial Port A Cable Not
Detected
1157-Front Cables Not Detected
Cable from serial port header to I/O connector is missing or not connected properly.
Cable from front panel USB and audio connectors is missing or not connected properly.
1720-SMART Hard Drive Detects
Imminent Failure
1721-SMART SCSI Hard Drive
Detects Imminent Failure
SMART circuitry on an IDE drive has detected possible equipment failure.
SMART circuitry on a SCSI drive has detected possible equipment failure.
1785-MultiBay incorrectly installed For MultiBay option or
non-USDT systems:
Multibay option ribbon cables not seated or improperly attached.
or
MultiBay device not properly seated.
or
MultiBay diskette present
For integrated MultiBay/ USDT systems:
MultiBay device not properly seated.
or
MultiBay riser not properly seated.
1794--Inaccessible device attached to SATA 1
(for systems with 2 SATA ports)
A device is attached to SATA 1. Any device attached to this connector will be inaccessible while “SATA Emulation” is set to “Combined IDE
Controller” in Computer Setup.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-3
Error Messages and Codes
Table A-2. (Continued)
Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages
Error Message Probable Cause
1794-Inaccessible devices attached to SATA 1 and/or SATA 3
(for systems with 4 SATA ports)
A device is attached to SATA 1 and/or SATA 3.
Devices attached to these connectors will be inaccessible while “SATA
Emulation” is set to “Combined IDE Controller” in Computer Setup
1796-SATA Cabling Error
1801-Microcode Patch Error
1998-Master Boot Record Backup
Has Been Lost
A processor is installed for which the BIOS ROM has no patch. Check for ROM update.
Backup copy of the hard drive master boot record is corrupted. Use
Setup to restore the backup from the hard drive.
1999-Master Boot Record Has
Changed. Press Any Key To Enter
Setup to Restore the MBR.
2000-Master boot Record hard drive has changed
Invalid Electronic Serial Number
One or more SATA devices are improperly attached. For optimal performance, the SATA 0 and SATA 1 connectors must be used before
SATA 2 and SATA 3.
If Master Boot Record Security is enabled, this message indicates that the MBR has changed since the backup was made.
The hard drive has been changed. Use Setup to create a backup of the new hard drive.
Electronic serial number has become corrupted.
Keyboard failure while Network Server Mode enabled.
Network Server Mode Active and
No Keyboard Attached
Parity Check 2 Keyboard failure while Network Server Mode enabled.
A-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.4 System Error Messages (1xx-xx)
105-09
105-10
105-11
105-12
105-13
105-14
106-01
107-01
108-02
108-03
109-01
105-01
105-02
105-03
105-04
105-05
105-06
105-07
105-08
Message
101
102
103
104-01
104-02
104-03
Probable Cause
Option ROM error
System board failure [1]
System board failure
Master int. cntlr. test fialed
Slave int. cntlr. test failed
Int. cntlr. SW RTC inoperative
Port 61 bit <6> not at zero
Port 61 bit <5> not at zero
Port 61 bit <3> not at zero
Port 61 bit <1> not at zero
Port 61 bit <0> not at zero
Port 61 bit <5> not at one
Port 61 bit <3> not at one
Port 61 bit <1> not at one
Port 61 bit <0> not at one
Port 61 I/O test failed
Port 61 bit <7> not at zero
Port 61 bit <2> not at zero
No int. generated by failsafe timer
NMI not triggered by failsafe timer
Keyboard controller test failed
CMOS RAM test failed
CMOS interrupt test failed
CMOS not properly initialized (int.test)
CMOS clock load data test failed
112-07
112-08
112-09
112-10
112-11
112-12
113-01
114-01
116-xx
162-xx
163-xx
164-xx
199-00
Table A-3.
System Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
109-02
109-03
110-01
110-02
CMOS clock rollover test failed
CMOS not properly initialized (clk test)
Programmable timer load data test failed
Programmable timer dynamic test failed
110-03
111-01
112-01
112-02
112-03
112-04
112-05
112-06
Program timer 2 load data test failed
Refresh detect test failed
Speed test Slow mode out of range
Speed test Mixed mode out of range
Speed test Fast mode out of range
Speed test unable to enter Slow mode
Speed test unable to enter Mixed mode
Speed test unable to enter Fast mode
Speed test system error
Unable to enter Auto mode in speed test
Unable to enter High mode in speed test
Speed test High mode out of range
Speed test Auto mode out of range
Speed test variable speed mode inop.
Protected mode test failed
Speaker test failed
Way 0 read/write test failed
Sys. options failed (mismatch in drive type)
Time and date not set
Memory size
Installed devices test failed
NOTES:
[1] 102 message code may be caused by one of a variety of processor-related problems that may be solved by replacing the processor, although system board replacement may be needed.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-5
Error Messages and Codes
204-03
204-04
204-05
205-01
205-02
205-03
206-xx
207-xx
210-01
210-02
210-03
211-01
202-01
202-02
202-03
203-01
203-02
203-03
204-01
204-02
Message
200-04
200-05
200-06
200-07
200-08
201-01
A.5 Memory Error Messages (2xx-xx)
Table A-4.
Memory Error Messages
Probable Cause
Real memory size changed
Extended memory size changed
Invalid memory configuration
Extended memory size changed
CLIM memory size changed
Memory machine ID test failed
Memory system ROM checksum failed
Failed RAM/ROM map test
Failed RAM/ROM protect test
Memory read/write test failed
Error while saving block in read/write test
Error while restoring block in read/write test
Memory address test failed
Error while saving block in address test
Error while restoring block in address test
A20 address test failed
Page hit address test failed
Walking I/O test failed
Error while saving block in walking I/O test
Error while restoring block in walking I/O test
Increment pattern test failed
ECC failure
Memory increment pattern test
Error while saving memory during increment pattern test
Error while restoring memory during increment pattern test
Memory random pattern test
A-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
Message
211-02
211-03
213-xx
214-xx
215-xx
Table A-4. (Continued)
Memory Error Messages
Probable Cause
Error while saving memory during random memory pattern test
Error while restoring memory during random memory pattern test
Incompatible DIMM in slot x
Noise test failed
Random address test
A.6 Keyboard Error Messages (30x-xx)
Message Probable Cause
300-xx Failed ID test
301-01
301-02
Kybd short test, 8042 self-test failed
Kybd short test, interface test failed
Table A-5.
Keyboard Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
303-05 LED test, LED command test failed
303-06 LED test, LED command test failed
303-07 LED test, LED command test failed
301-03
301-04
301-05
302-xx
Kybd short test, echo test failed
Kybd short test, kybd reset failed
Kybd short test, kybd reset failed
Failed individual key test
303-08
303-09
304-01
304-02
LED test, command byte restore test failed
LED test, LEDs failed to light
Keyboard repeat key test failed
Unable to enter mode 3
302-01
303-01
303-02
303-03
303-04
Kybd long test failed
LED test, 8042 self-test failed
LED test, reset test failed
LED test, reset failed
LED test, LED command test failed --
304-03
304-04
304-05
304-06
Incorrect scan code from keyboard
No Make code observed
Cannot /disable repeat key feature
Unable to return to Normal mode
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-7
Error Messages and Codes
A.7 Printer Error Messages (4xx-xx)
Table A-6
Printer Error Messages
Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause
401-01
402-01
Printer failed or not connected
Printer data register failed
402-11
402-12
Interrupt test, data/cntrl. reg. failed
Interrupt test and loopback test failed
402-02
402-03
402-04
402-05
Printer control register failed
Data and control registers failed
Loopback test failed
402-13
402-14
402-15
402-16
Int. test, LpBk. test., and data register failed
Int. test, LpBk. test., and cntrl. register failed
Int. test, LpBk. test., and data/cntrl. reg. failed
Unexpected interrupt received
402-06
Loopback test and data reg. failed
Loopback test and cntrl. reg. failed
402-01 Printer pattern test failed
402-07
402-08
402-09
402-10
Loopback tst, data/cntrl. reg. failed
403-xx
Interrupt test failed 404-xx
Interrupt test and data reg. failed 498-00
Interrupt test and control reg. failed
--
Printer pattern test failed
Parallel port address conflict
Printer failed or not connected
--
A.8 Video (Graphics) Error Messages (5xx-xx)
Table A-7.
Video (Graphics) Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
501-01 Video controller test failed
Message
508-01
Probable Cause
320x200 mode, color set 0 test failed
502-01
503-01
504-01
505-01
506-01
507-01
Video memory test failed
Video attribute test failed
Video character set test failed
80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed
40x25 mode test failed
509-01
510-01
511-01
512-01
80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed 514-01
516-01
320x200 mode, color set 1 test failed
640x200 mode test failed
Screen memory page test failed
Gray scale test failed
White screen test failed
Noise pattern test failed
See Table A-14 for additional video (graphics) messages.
A-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.9 Diskette Drive Error Messages (6xx-xx)
6xx-06
6xx-07
6xx-08
6xx-09
6xx-10
Message Probable Cause
Table A-8.
Diskette Drive Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
6xx-01
6xx-02
Exceeded maximum soft error limit
Exceeded maximum hard error limit
6xx-20
6xx-21
Previously exceeded max soft limit 6xx-22
Failed to get drive type
Failed to get change line status
6xx-03
6xx-04
6xx-05
Previously exceeded max hard limit 6xx-23
Failed to reset controller
Fatal error while reading
Fatal error while writing
Failed compare of R/W buffers
Failed to format a tract
Failed sector wrap test
6xx-24
6xx-25
6xx-26
6xx-27
6xx-28
--
Failed to clear change line status
Failed to set drive type in ID media
Failed to read diskette media
Failed to verify diskette media
Failed to read media in speed test
Failed speed limits
Failed write-protect test
--
600-xx = Diskette drive ID test
601-xx = Diskette drive format
602-xx = Diskette read test
603-xx = Diskette drive R/W compare test
604-xx = Diskette drive random seek test
605-xx = Diskette drive ID media
606-xx = Diskette drive speed test
607-xx = Diskette drive wrap test
608-xx = Diskette drive write-protect test
609-xx = Diskette drive reset controller test
610-xx = Diskette drive change line test
611-xx = Pri. diskette drive port addr. conflict
612-xx = Sec. diskette drive port addr. conflict
694-00 = Pin 34 not cut on 360-KB drive
697-00 = Diskette type error
698-00 = Drive speed not within limits
699-00 = Drive/media ID error (run Setup)
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-9
Error Messages and Codes
A.10 Serial Interface Error Messages (11xx-xx)
Message Probable Cause
1101-01
1101-02
UART DLAB bit failure
Line input or UART fault
1101-03
1101-04
1101-05
1101-06
1101-07
1101-08
1101-09
1101-10
1101-11
1101-12
Address line fault
Data line fault
UART cntrl. signal failure
UART THRE bit failure
UART Data RDY bit failure
UART TX/RX buffer failure
Interrupt circuit failure
COM1 set to invalid INT
COM2 set to invalid INT
Table A-9.
Serial Interface Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
DRVR/RCVR cntrl. signal failure
1101-13
1101-14
1109-01
1109-02
1109-03
1109-04
1109-05
1109-06
1150-xx
1151-xx
1152-xx
1155-xx
UART cntrl. signal interrupt failure
DRVR/RCVR data failure
Clock register initialization failure
Clock register rollover failure
Clock reset failure
Input line or clock failure
Address line fault
Data line fault
Comm port setup error (run Setup)
COM1 address conflict
COM2 address conflict
COM port address conflict
A-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.11 Modem Communications Error Messages (12xx-xx)
Table A-10.
Modem Communications Error Messages
Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause
1201-XX
1201-01
1201-02
1201-03
1201-04
1201-05
Modem internal loopback test
UART DLAB bit failure
Line input or UART failure
Address line failure
Data line fault
UART control signal failure
1204-03
1204-04
1204-05
1204-06
1204-07
1204-08
Data block retry limit reached [4]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
1201-06
1201-07
1201-08
UART THRE bit failure
UART DATA READY bit failure
UART TX/RX buffer failure
1204-09
1204-10
1204-11
Dial number string too long
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
Modem auto answer test 1201-09
1201-10
1201-11
1201-12
1201-13
Interrupt circuit failure
COM1 set to invalid inturrupt
COM2 set to invalid
1205-XX
1205-01
1205-02
DRVR/RCVR control signal failure 1205-03
UART control signal interrupt failure
DRVR/RCVR data failure
1205-04
1205-05
Time-out waiting for SYNC [5]
Time-out waiting for response [5]
Data block retry limit reached [5]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
1201-14
1201-15
1201-16
1201-17
Modem detection failure
Modem ROM, checksum failure
Tone detect failure
1205-06
1205-07
1205-08
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
Dial number string too long
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
1202-XX
1202-01
1202-02
1202-03
1202-11
1202-12
Modem internal test
Time-out waiting for SYNC [1]
1205-09
1205-10
Time-out waiting for response [1] 1205-11
Data block retry limit reached [1] 1206-XX
Time-out waiting for SYNC [2] 1206-17
Time-out waiting for response [2] 1210-XX
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
Dial multi-frequency tone test
Tone detection failure
Modem direct connect test
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-11
Error Messages and Codes
Table A-10. (Continued)
Modem Communications Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
1202-13
Message
Data block retry limit reached [2] 1210-01
Probable Cause
Time-out waiting for SYNC [6]
1202-21
1202-22
1202-23
1203-XX
1203-01
1203-02
1203-03
Time-out waiting for SYNC [3]
Time-out waiting for response [3] 1210-03
Data block retry limit reached [3] 1210-04
Modem external termination test
1210-02
1210-05
Modem external TIP/RING failure
1210-06
Modem external data TIP/RING fail
1210-07
Modem line termination failure 1210-08
Time-out waiting for response [6]
Data block retry limit reached [6]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
Dial number string too long
1204-XX
1204-01
1204-02
Modem auto originate test
Time-out waiting for SYNC [4]
1210-09
1210-10
Time-out waiting for response [4] 1210-11
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
NOTES:
[1] Local loopback mode
[2] Analog loopback originate mode
[3] Analog loopback answer mode
[4] Modem auto originate test
[5] Modem auto answer test
[6] Modem direct connect test
A.12 System Status Error Messages (16xx-xx)
Message
1601-xx
1611-xx
Table A-11
System Status Error Messages
Probable Cause
Temperature violation
Fan failure
A-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.13 Hard Drive Error Messages (17xx-xx)
Message Probable Cause
17xx-01
17xx-02
17xx-03
Exceeded max. soft error limit
Exceeded max. Hard error limit
17xx-04
Table A-12
Hard Drive Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
Previously exceeded max. soft error limit
Previously exceeded max.hard error limit
17xx-51
17xx-52
17xx-53
17xx-54
Failed I/O read test
Failed file I/O compare test
Failed drive/head register test
Failed digital input register test
17xx-05
17xx-06
17xx-07
17xx-08
17xx-09
17xx-10
Failed to reset controller
Fatal error while reading
Fatal error while writing
Failed compare of R/W buffers
Failed to format a track
Failed diskette sector wrap during read
17xx-55
17xx-56
17xx-57
17xx-58
17xx-59
17xx-60
Cntlr. failed to deallocate bad sectors 17xx-62
Cylinder 1 error
Failed controller RAM diagnostics
Failed controller-to-drive diagnostics
Failed to write sector buffer
Failed to read sector buffer
Failed uncorrectable ECC error
17xx-19
17xx-40
17xx-41
17xx-42
17xx-43
17xx-44
17xx-45
Cylinder 0 error
Drive not ready
Failed to recalibrate drive
Failed to format a bad track
17xx-63
17xx-65
17xx-66
17xx-67
Failed correctable ECC error
Failed soft error rate
Exceeded max. bad sectors per track
Failed to initialize drive parameter
Failed to write long
Failed to read long
Failed to read drive size
17xx-46
17xx-47
17xx-48
17xx-49
17xx-50
Failed controller diagnostics
Failed to get drive parameters from
ROM
Invalid drive parameters from ROM
17xx-68
17xx-69
17xx-70
Failed to park heads
Failed to move hard drive table to
RAM
17xx-71
17xx-72
Failed to read media in file write test 17xx-73
Failed I/O write test --
Failed translate mode
Failed non-translate mode
Bad track limit exceeded
Previously exceeded bad track limit
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-13
Error Messages and Codes
NOTE: xx = 00, Hard drive ID test xx = 01, Hard drive format test xx = 02, Hard drive read test xx = 19, Hard drive power mode test xx = 20, SMART drive detects imminent failure xx = 21, SCSI hard drive imminent failure xx = 03, Hard drive read/write compare test xx = 24, Net work preparation test xx = 04, Hard drive random seek test xx = 05, Hard drive controller test xx = 36, Drive monitoring test xx = 71, Pri. IDE controller address conflict xx = 06, Hard drive ready test xx = 07, Hard drive recalibrate test xx = 72, Sec. IDE controller address conflict xx = 80, Disk 0 failure xx = 08, Hard drive format bad track test xx = 81, Disk 1 failure xx = 09, Hard drive reset controller test xx = 82, Pri. IDE controller failure xx = 10, Hard drive park head test xx = 14, Hard drive file write test xx = 90, Disk 0 failure xx = 91, Disk 1 failure xx = 15, Hard drive head select test xx = 92, Se. controller failure xx = 16, Hard drive conditional format test xx = 93, Sec. Controller or disk failure xx = 17, Hard drive ECC test xx = 99, Invalid hard drive type
A-14 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.14 Hard Drive Error Messages (19xx-xx)
19xx-15
19xx-16
19xx-17
19xx-18
19xx-19
19xx-20
19xx-07
19xx-08
19xx-09
19xx-10
19xx-11
19xx-12
19xx-13
19xx-14
Message Probable Cause
19xx-01
19xx-02
Drive not installed
Cartridge not installed
Table A-13
Hard Drive Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
19xx-21
19xx-22
Got servo pulses second time but not first
Never got to EOT after servo check
19xx-03
19xx-04
19xx-05
19xx-06
Tape motion error
Drive busy erro
Track seek error
Tape write-protect error
19xx-23
19xx-24
19xx-25
19xx-26
Change line unset
Write-protect error
Unable to erase cartridge
Cannot identify drive
Tape already Servo Written
Unable to Servo Write
Unable to format
Format mode error
Drive recalibration error
Tape not Servo Written
Tape not formatted
Drive time-out error
19xx-27
19xx-28
19xx-30
19xx-31
19xx-32
19xx-33
19xx-34
19xx-35
Drive not compatible with controller
Format gap error
Exception bit not set
Unexpected drive status
Device fault
Illegal command
No data detected
Power-on reset occurred
Sensor error flag
Block locate (block ID) error
Soft error limit exceeded
Hard error limit exceeded
Write (probably ID ) error
NEC fatal error
19xx-36
19xx-37
19xx-38
19xx-39
19xx-40
19xx-91
Failed to set FLEX format mode
Failed to reset FLEX format mode
Data mismatch on directory track
Data mismatch on track 0
Failed self-test
Power lost during test
1900-xx = Tape ID test failed
1901-xx = Tape servo write failed
1902-xx = Tape format failed
1903-xx = Tape drive sensor test failed
1904-xx = Tape BOT/EOT test failed
1905-xx = Tape read test failed
1906-xx = Tape R/W compare test failed
1907-xx = Tape write-protect failed
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-15
Error Messages and Codes
A.15 Video (Graphics) Error Messages (24xx-xx)
2406-01
2407-01
2408-01
2409-01
2410-01
2411-01
2412-01
2414-01
Message Probable Cause
Table A-14
Video (Graphics) Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
2402-01
2403-01
2404-01
2405-01
Video memory test failed
Video attribute test failed
Video character set test failed
80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed
2418-02
2419-01
2420-01
2421-01
EGA shadow RAM test failed
EGA ROM checksum test failed
EGA attribute test failed
640x200 mode test failed
2416-01
2417-01
2417-02
2417-03
2417-04
2418-01
80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed
40x25 mode test failed
320x200 mode color set 0 test failed 2424-01
320x200 mode color set 1 test failed 2425-01
640x200 mode test failed
Screen memory page test failed
Gray scale test failed
White screen test failed
Noise pattern test failed
Lightpen text test failed, no response
Lightpen text test failed, invalid response
2422-01
2423-01
2431-01
2432-01
2448-01
2451-01
2456-01
2458-xx
2468-xx
Lightpen graphics test failed, no resp.
2477-xx
Lightpen graphics tst failed, invalid resp.
2478-xx
EGA memory test failed 2480-xx
640x350 16-color set test failed
640x350 64-color set test failed
EGA Mono. text mode test failed
EGA Mono. graphics mode test failed
640x480 graphics mode test failed
320x200 256-color set test failed
Advanced VGA controller test failed
132-column AVGA test failed
AVGA 256-color test failed
AVGA BitBLT test failed
AVGA DAC test failed
AVGA data path test failed
AVGA BitBLT test failed
AVGA linedraw test failed
A.16 Audio Error Messages (3206-xx)
Message
3206-xx
Table A-15
Audio Error Messages
Probable Cause
Audio subsystem internal error
A-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.17 DVD/CD-ROM Error Messages (33xx-xx)
Message
3301-xx
3305-xx
Table A-16
DVD/CD-ROM Error Messages
Probable Cause
Drive test failed
Seek test failed
A.18 Network Interface Error Messages (60xx-xx)
Table A-17
Network Interface Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
6000-xx Pointing device interface error
Message
6054-xx
Probable Cause
Token ring configuration test failed
6014-xx
6016-xx
6028-xx
6029-xx
Ethernet configuration test failed
Ethernet reset test failed
6056-xx
6068-xx
Ethernet int. loopback test failed 6069-xx
Ethernet ext. loopback test failed 6089-xx
Token ring reset test failed
Token ring int. loopback test failed
Token ring ext. loopback test failed
Token ring open
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-17
Error Messages and Codes
A.19 SCSI Interface Error Messages (65xx-xx, 66xx-xx,
67xx-xx)
6nyy-09
6nyy-10
6nyy-11
6nyy-12
6nyy-13
6nyy-14
6nyy-15
6nyy-16
Message
6nyy-02
6nyy-03
6nyy-05
6nyy-06
6nyy-07
6nyy-08
6nyy-17
6nyy-18
6nyy-21
6nyy-24
6nyy-25
6nyy-30
6nyy-31
6nyy-32 n = 5, Hard drive
= 6, CD-ROM drive
= 7, Tape drive yy = 00, ID
= 03, Power check
= 05, Read
= 06, SA/Media
= 08, Controller
= 23, Random read
= 28, Media load/unload
Probable Cause
Drive not installed
Media not installed
Seek failure
Drive timed out
Drive busy
Drive already reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Media soft error
Drive not ready
Media error
Drive hardware error
Illegal drive command
Media was changed
Tape write-protected
No data detected
Drive command aborted
Media hard error
Table A-18
SCSI Interface Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
Reserved
Controller timed out
Unrecoverable error
Controller/drive not connected
6nyy-33
6nyy-34
6nyy-35
6nyy-36
6nyy-39
6nyy-40
6nyy-41
6nyy-42
6nyy-43
6nyy-44
6nyy-50
6nyy-51
6nyy-52
6nyy-53
6nyy-54
6nyy-60
6nyy-61
6nyy-65
6nyy-90
6nyy-91
6nyy-92
6nyy-99
Illegal controller command
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Error status from drive
Drive timed out
SSI bus stayed busy
ACK/REQ lines bad
ACK did not deassert
Parity error
Data pins bad
Data line 7 bad
MSG, C/D, or I/O lines bad
BSY never went busy
BSY stayed busy
Controller CONFIG-1 register fault
Controller CONFIG-2 register fault
Media not unloaded
Fan failure
Over temperature condition
Side panel not installed
Autoloader reported tape not loaded properly
A-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Error Messages and Codes
A.20 Pointing Device Interface Error Messages
(8601-xx)
Table A-19
Pointing Device Interface Error Messages
Message Probable Cause
8601-01 Mouse ID fails
Message
8601-07
Probable Cause
Right block not selected
8601-02
8601-03
8601-04
8601-05
8601-06
Left mouse button is inoperative
Left mouse button is stuck closed
Right mouse button is inoperative 8601-10
Right mouse button is stuck closed 8602-xx
Left block not selected
8601-08
8601-09
--
Timeout occurred
Mouse loopback test failed
Pointing device is inoperative
I/F test failed
--
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 A-19
Error Messages and Codes
A-20 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
B
ASCII Character Set
B.1 Introduction
This appendix lists, in Table B-1, the 256-character ASCII code set including the decimal and hexadecimal values. All ASCII symbols may be called while in DOS or using standard text-mode editors by using the combination keystroke of holding the Alt key and using the
Numeric Keypad to enter the decimal value of the symbol. The extended ASCII characters
(decimals 128-255) can only be called using the Alt + Numeric Keypad keys.
✎
Regarding keystrokes, refer to notes at the end of the table. Applications may interpret multiple keystroke accesses differently or ignore them completely.
0A
0B
0C
0D
06
07
08
09
0E
0F
10
11
02
03
04
05
Hex
00
01
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
16
17
4
5
2
3
Dec
0
1
™ l m
©
®
ß
Symbol
Blank
4
3
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
46
47
48
49
34
35
36
37
Dec
32
33
2A
2B
2C
2D
26
27
28
29
2E
2F
30
31
22
23
24
25
Hex
20
21
.
/
-
`
0
1
*
+
)
(
&
‘
$
%
Table B-1.
ASCII Character Set
Symbol Dec Hex
Space
!
“
#
64
65
66
67
40
41
42
43
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
48
49
4A
4B
44
45
46
47
76
77
78
79
80
81
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
L
M
J
K
H
I
F
G
P
Q
N
O
Symbol
@
A
D
E
B
C
6A
6B
6C
6D
66
67
68
69
6E
6F
70
71
62
63
64
65
Hex
60
61
106
107
108
109
102
103
104
105
110
111
112
113
98
99
100
101
Dec
96
97 l m j k
I h f g p q n o
Symbol
‘ a d e b c
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 B-1
ASCII Character Set
8B
8C
8D
8E
87
88
89
8A
8F
90
83
84
85
86
1F
80
81
82
1B
1C
1D
1E
17
18
19
1A
Hex
12
13
14
15
16
139
140
141
142
135
136
137
138
143
144
131
132
133
134
31
128
129
130
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
Dec
18
19
20
21
22
Symbol
×
§
0
!!
¶
Ø
Æ
×
¦
¨
AB
AC
AD
AE
A7
A8
A9
AA
AF
B0
A3
A4
A5
A6
3F
A0
A1
A2
3B
3C
3D
3E
37
38
39
3A
Hex
32
33
34
35
36
171
172
173
174
167
168
169
170
175
176
163
164
165
166
63
160
161
162
59
60
61
62
55
56
57
58
Dec
50
51
52
53
54
î
ï
ë
è
ç
ê
à
å
Å
É
ì
Ä
â
ä
ü
é t
Ç
´ s
¡
«
»
¬
½
¼
Ñ
ª
ú
ñ
º
¿
í
ó
?
á
=
>
;
<
9
:
7
8
5
6
3
4
Table B-1. (Continued)
ASCII Character Set
Symbol
2
Dec
82
Hex
52
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
57
58
59
5A
53
54
55
56
199
200
201
202
195
196
197
198
95
192
193
194
91
92
93
94
C7
C8
C9
CA
C3
C4
C5
C6
5F
C0
C1
C2
5B
5C
5D
5E
203
204
205
206
207
208
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
]
^
[
\
_
Y
Z
W
X
Symbol
R
U
V
S
T
EB
EC
ED
EE
E7
E8
E9
EA
EF
F0
E3
E4
E5
E6
7F
E0
E1
E2
7B
7C
7D
7E
77
78
79
7A
Hex
72
73
74
75
76
235
236
237
238
231
232
233
234
239
240
227
228
229
230
127
224
225
226
123
124
125
126
119
120
121
122
Dec
114
115
116
117
118
}
~
{
|
[1] y z w x
Symbol r u v s t
ß
µ
B-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
ASCII Character Set
154
155
156
157
150
151
152
153
158
159
Dec
145
146
147
148
149
9A
9B
9C
9D
96
97
98
99
9E
9F
Hex
91
92
93
94
95
£
¥
Ü
¢
ÿ
Ö
û
ù
Symbol
æ
ö
ò
Æ
ô
ƒ
BA
BB
BC
BD
B6
B7
B8
B9
BE
BF
Hex
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
186
187
188
189
182
183
184
185
190
191
Dec
177
178
179
180
181
Table B-1. (Continued)
ASCII Character Set
Symbol Dec
209
Hex
D1
210
211
212
213
D2
D3
D4
D5
218
219
220
221
214
215
216
217
222
223
DA
DB
DC
DD
D6
D7
D8
D9
DE
DF
Symbol Symbol
±
÷
°
²
·
·
Blank
NOTES:
[1] Symbol not displayed.
Keystroke Guide:
Dec #
0
Keystroke(s)
Ctrl 2
1-26
27
28
29
Ctrl A thru Z respectively
Ctrl [
Ctrl
Ctrl ]
30
31
32
33-43
44-47
48-57
58
59
Ctrl 6
Ctrl -
Space Bar
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol, numerical keypad w/Num Lock active
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
60
61
62-64
65-90
91-93
94, 95
96
97-126
127
128-255
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol or key w/corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active
Key w/corresponding symbol
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol or Shift and key w/corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active
Ctrl -
Alt and decimal digit(s) of desired character
FA
FB
FC
FD
F8
F9
F6
F7
FE
FF
Hex
F1
F4
F5
F2
F3
250
251
252
253
246
247
248
249
254
255
Dec
241
242
243
244
245
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 B-3
ASCII Character Set
B-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
C
Keyboard
C.1 Introduction
This appendix describes the HP keyboard that is included as standard with the system unit. The keyboard complies with the industry-standard classification of an “enhanced keyboard” and includes a separate cursor control key cluster, twelve “function” keys, and enhanced programmability for additional functions.
This appendix covers the following keyboard types:
■
■
Standard enhanced keyboard.
Space-Saver Windows-version keyboard featuring additional keys for specific support of the
Windows operating system.
■ Easy Access keyboard with additional buttons for internet accessibility functions.
Only one type of keyboard is supplied with each system. Other types may be available as an option.
✎
This appendix discusses only the keyboard unit. The keyboard interface is a function of the system unit and is discussed in Chapter 5, Input/Output Interfaces.
C.2 Keystroke Processing
A functional block diagram of the keystroke processing elements is shown in Figure C-1. Power
(+5 VDC) is obtained from the system through the PS/2-type interface. The keyboard uses a
Z86C14 (or equivalent) microprocessor. The Z86C14 scans the key matrix drivers every 10 ms for pressed keys while at the same time monitoring communications with the keyboard interface of the system unit. When a key is pressed, a Make code is generated. A Break code is generated when the key is released. The Make and Break codes are collectively referred to as scan codes.
All keys generate Make and Break codes with the exception of the Pause key, which generates a
Make code only.
C-1 Technical Reference Guide 361834-002
Keyboard
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Scroll
Lock
Keyswitch
Matrix
Matrix
Drivers
Matrix
Receivers
Keyboard
Processor
Data/
CLK
Keyboard
Interface
(System Unit)
Figure C-1. Keystroke Processing Elements, Block Diagram
When the system is turned on, the keyboard processor generates a Power-On Reset (POR) signal after a period of 150 ms to 2 seconds. The keyboard undergoes a Basic Assurance Test (BAT) that checks for shorted keys and basic operation of the keyboard processor. The BAT takes from
300 to 500 ms to complete.
If the keyboard fails the BAT, an error code is sent to the CPU and the keyboard is disabled until an input command is received. After successful completion of the POR and BAT, a completion code (AAh) is sent to the CPU and the scanning process begins.
The keyboard processor includes a 16-byte FIFO buffer for holding scan codes until the system is ready to receive them. Response and typematic codes are not buffered. If the buffer is full (16 bytes held) a 17th byte of a successive scan code results in an overrun condition and the overrun code replaces the scan code byte and any additional scan code data (and the respective key strokes) are lost. Multi-byte sequences must fit entirely into the buffer before the respective keystroke can be registered.
C-2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
C.2.1 PS/2-Type Keyboard Transmissions
The PS/2-type keyboard sends two main types of data to the system; commands (or responses to system commands) and keystroke scan codes. Before the keyboard sends data to the system
(specifically, to the 8042-type logic within the system), the keyboard verifies the clock and data lines to the system. If the clock signal is low (0), the keyboard recognizes the inhibited state and loads the data into a buffer. Once the inhibited state is removed, the data is sent to the system.
Keyboard-to-system transfers (in the default mode) consist of 11 bits as shown in Figure C-2.
Tcy
Tcl
Tch
Clock
Data
Start
Bit
Th-b-t
(LSb)
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
3
Data
4
Data
5
Data
6
(MSb)
Data
7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Parameter
Tcy (clock cycle)
Tcl (clock low)
Tch (clock high)
Minimum Nominal
60 us
30 us
30 us
Th-b-t (high-before-transmit) --
--
41 us
--
20 us
Maximum
80 us
50 us
40 us
--
Figure C-2. PS/2 Keyboard-To-System Transmission, Timing Diagram
The system can halt keyboard transmission by setting the clock signal low. The keyboard checks the clock line every 60 µs to verify the state of the signal. If a low is detected, the keyboard will finish the current transmission if the rising edge of the clock pulse for the parity bit has not occurred. The system uses the same timing relationships during reads (typically with slightly reduced time periods).
The enhanced keyboard has three operating modes:
■
■
■
Mode 1—PC-XT compatible
Mode 2—PC-AT compatible (default)
Mode 3—Select mode (keys are programmable as to make-only, break-only, typematic)
Modes can be selected by the user or set by the system. Mode 2 is the default mode. Each mode produces a different set of scan codes. When a key is pressed, the keyboard processor sends that key's make code to the 8042 logic of the system unit. The When the key is released, a release code is transmitted as well (except for the Pause key, which produces only a make code). The
8042-type logic of the system unit responds to scan code reception by asserting IRQ1, which is processed by the interrupt logic and serviced by the CPU with an interrupt service routine. The service routine takes the appropriate action based on which key was pressed.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-3
Keyboard
C.2.2 USB-Type Keyboard Transmissions
The USB-type keyboard sends essentially the same information to the system that the PS/2 keyboard does except that the data receives additional NRZI encoding and formatting (prior to leaving the keyboard) to comply with the USB I/F specification (discussed in chapter 5 of this guide).
Packets received at the system's USB I/F and decoded as originating from the keyboard result in an SMI being generated. An SMI handler routine is invoked that decodes the data and transfers the information to the 8042 keyboard controller where normal (legacy) keyboard processing takes place.
C.2.3 Keyboard Layouts
Figures C-3 through C-8 show the key layouts for keyboards shipped with HPsystems. Actual styling details including location of the HP logo as well as the numbers lock, caps lock, and scroll lock LEDs may vary.
C.2.3.1 Standard Enhanced Keyboards
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 30
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
92 93 94 95
86
96
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
52 53 54 55 56 57
58
72 73 74
97
87
98 99
88 89 90
100 101
91
Figure C-3. U.S. English (101-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
71
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 103
75 104 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
92 93 94 95
86
96
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
52 53 54 55 56 57
58
72 73 74
97
87
98 99
88 89 90
100 101
91
Figure C-4. National (102-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
C-4 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
C.2.3.2 Windows Enhanced Keyboards
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
30
92
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
110 93 94 95 111 112
86
96
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
52 53 54 55 56 57
72 73 74
97
87
98 99
88 89 90
100 101
58
91
Figure C-5. U.S. English Windows (101W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
71
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 103
75 104 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
92 110 93 94 95 111 112
86
96
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
52 53 54 55 56 57
58
72 73 74
97
87
98 99
88 89 90
100 101
91
Figure C-6. National Windows (102W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-5
Keyboard
C.2.3.3 Easy Access Keyboard
The Easy Access keyboard is a Windows Enhanced-type keyboard that includes special buttons allowing quick internet navigation. The Easy Access Keyboard uses the PS/2-type connection.
Btn 1 Btn 2 Btn 3 Btn 4 Btn 5 Btn 6 Btn 7 Btn 8
✎
Main key positions same as Windows Enhanced (Figures C-5 or C-6).
Figure C-7. 8-Button Easy Access Keyboard Layout
C-6 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
C.2.4 Keys
All keys generate a Make code (when pressed) and a Break code (when released) with the exception of the Pause key (pos. 16), which produces a Make code only. All keys with the exception of the Pause and Easy Access keys are also typematic, although the typematic action of the Shift, Ctrl, Alt, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Caps Lock , and Ins keys is suppressed by the BIOS. Typematic keys, when held down longer than 500 ms, send the Make code repetitively at a 10-12 Hz rate until the key is released. If more than one key is held down, the last key pressed will be typematic.
C.2.4.1 Special Single-Keystroke Functions
The following keys provide the intended function in most applications and environments.
Caps Lock —The Caps Lock key (pos. 59), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the caps lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 40-49, 60-68, and 76-82.
When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the LED is turned off. Use of the Shift key will reverse which state these keys are in based on the Caps Lock key.
Num Lock —The Num Lock key (pos. 32), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the num lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 55-57, 72-74, 88-90,
100, and 101. When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the
LED is turned off.
The following keys provide special functions that require specific support by the application.
Print Scrn —The Print Scrn (pos. 14) key can, when pressed, generate an interrupt that initiates a print routine. This function may be inhibited by the application.
Scroll Lock —The Scroll Lock key (pos. 15) when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the scroll lock LED and inhibits movement of the cursor. When pressed and released again, the LED is turned off and the function is removed. This keystroke is always serviced by the BIOS (as indicated by the LED) but may be inhibited or ignored by the application.
Pause —The Pause (pos. 16) key, when pressed, can be used to cause the keyboard interrupt to loop, i.e., wait for another key to be pressed. This can be used to momentarily suspend an operation. The key that is pressed to resume operation is discarded. This function may be ignored by the application.
The Esc , Fn (function), Insert , Home , Page Up / Down, Delete , and End keys operate at the discretion of the application software.
C.2.4.2 Multi-Keystroke Functions
Shift —The Shift key (pos. 75/86), when held down, produces a shift state (upper case) for keys in positions 17-29, 30, 39-51, 60-70, and 76-85 as long as the Caps Lock key (pos. 59) is toggled off. If the Caps Lock key is toggled on, then a held Shift key produces the lower
(normal) case for the identified pressed keys. The Shift key also reverses the Num Lock state of key positions 55-57, 72, 74, 88-90, 100, and 101.
Ctrl —The Ctrl keys (pos. 92/96) can be used in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 16,
17-34, 39-54, 60-71, and 76-84. The application determines the actual function. Both Ctrl key positions provide identical functionality. The pressed combination of Ctrl and Break (pos. 16) results in the generation of BIOS function INT 1Bh. This software interrupt provides a method of exiting an application and generally halts execution of the current program.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-7
Keyboard
Alt —The Alt keys (pos. 93/95) can be used in conjunction with the same keys available for use with the Ctrl keys with the exception that position 14 ( SysRq) is available instead of position 16
( Break ). The Alt key can also be used in conjunction with the numeric keypad keys (pos. 55-57,
72-74, and 88-90) to enter the decimal value of an ASCII character code from 1-255. The application determines the actual function of the keystrokes. Both Alt key positions provide identical functionality. The combination keystroke of Alt and SysRq results in software interrupt 15h, AX=8500h being executed. It is up to the application to use or not use this BIOS function.
The Ctrl and Alt keys can be used together in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 17-34,
39-54, 60-71, and 76-84. The Ctrl and Alt key positions used and the sequence in which they are pressed make no difference as long as they are held down at the time the third key is pressed. The
Ctrl , Alt , and Delete keystroke combination (required twice if in the Windows environment) initiates a system reset (warm boot) that is handled by the BIOS.
C.2.4.3 Windows Keystrokes
Windows-enhanced keyboards include three additional key positions. Key positions 110 and 111
(marked with the Windows logo ) have the same functionality and are used by themselves or in combination with other keys to perform specific “hot-key” type functions for the Windows operating system. The defined functions of the Windows logo keys are listed as follows:
Keystroke
Window Logo
Function
Open Start menu
Window Logo + F1
Window Logo + TAB
Window Logo + E
Window Logo + F
Display pop-up menu for the selected object
Activate next task bar button
Explore my computer
Find document
Window Logo + CTRL + F
Window Logo + M
Shift + Window Logo + M
Window Logo + R
Find computer
Minimize all
Undo minimize all
Display Run dialog box
Window Logo + PAUSE
Window Logo + 0-9
Perform system function
Reserved for OEM use (see following text)
The combination keystroke of the Window Logo + 1-0 keys are reserved for OEM use for auxiliary functions (speaker volume, monitor brightness, password, etc.).
Key position 112 (marked with an application window icon ) is used in combination with other keys for invoking Windows application functions.
C-8 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
C.2.4.4 Easy Access Keystrokes
The Easy Access keyboards(Figures C-7) include additional keys (also referred to as buttons) used to streamline internet access and navigation.
These buttons, which can be re-programmed to provide other functions, have the default functionality described below:
8-Button Easy Access Keyboard:
Button # Description Default Function
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Go to favorite web site Customer web site of choice
Go to AltaVista AltaVista web site
Search
Check Email
AltaVista search engine
Launches user Email
Business Community
Market Monitor
Meeting Center
News/PC Lock
Industry specification info
Launches Bloomberg market monitor
Links to user’s project center
News retrieval service
All buttons may be re-programmed by the user through the Easy Access utility.
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-9
Keyboard
C.2.5 Keyboard Commands
Table C-1 lists the commands that the keyboard can send to the system (specifically, to the
8042-type logic).
Table C-1.
Keyboard-to-System Commands
Value Description Command
Key Detection Error/Over/run 00h [1]
FFh [2]
Indicates to the system that a switch closure couldn’t be identified.
BAT Completion
BAT Failure
Echo
Acknowledge (ACK)
Resend
Keyboard ID
AAh Indicates to the system that the BAT has been successful.
Indicates failure of the BAT by the keyboard.
FCh
EEh
FAh
Indicates that the Echo command was received by the keyboard.
Issued by the keyboard as a response to valid system inputs (except the Echo and Resend commands).
Issued by the keyboard following an invalid input.
FEh
83ABh Upon receipt of the Read ID command from the system, the keyboard issues the ACK command followed by the two IDS bytes.
Note:
[1] Modes 2 and 3.
[2] Mode 1 only.
C-10 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F3
F4
F5
F6
Esc
F1
F2
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
C.2.6 Scan Codes
The scan codes generated by the keyboard processor are determined by the mode the keyboard is operating in.
■ Mode 1: In Mode 1 operation, the keyboard generates scan codes compatible with
8088-/8086-based systems. To enter Mode 1, the scan code translation function of the keyboard controller must be disabled. Since translation is not performed, the scan codes generated in Mode 1 are identical to the codes required by BIOS. Mode 1 is initiated by sending command F0h with the 01h option byte. Applications can obtain system codes and status information by using BIOS function INT 16h with AH=00h, 01h, and 02h.
■ Mode 2: Mode 2 is the default mode for keyboard operation. In this mode, the 8042 logic translates the make codes from the keyboard processor into the codes required by the BIOS.
This mode was made necessary with the development of the Enhanced III keyboard, which includes additional functions over earlier standard keyboards. Applications should use BIOS function INT 16h, with AH=10h, 11h, and 12h for obtaining codes and status data. In Mode
2, the keyboard generates the Break code, a two-byte sequence that consists of a Make code immediately preceded by F0h (i.e., Break code for 0Eh is “F0h 0Eh”).
■ Mode 3: Mode 3 generates a different scan code set from Modes 1 and 2. Code translation must be disabled since translation for this mode cannot be done.
NOTES:
Table C-2.
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
41/C1
42/C2
43/C3
44/C4
57/D7
58/D8
01/81
3B/BB
3C/BC
3D/BD
3E/BE
3F/BF
40/C0
76/F0 76
05/F0 05
06/F0 06
04/F0 04
0C/F0 0C
03/F0 03
0B/F0 0B
83/F0 83
0A/F0 0A
01/FO 01
09/F0 09
78/F0 78
07/F0 07
37/na
3F/na
47/na
4F/na
56/na
5E/na
08/na
07/na
0F/na
17/na
1F/na
27/na
2F/na
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-11
Keyboard
Table C-2. (Continued)
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1
14
15
16
33
34
Mode 2 Mode 3
Pause
2
3
`
1
6
7
4
5
-
0
8
9
=
\
Print Scrn E0 2A E0 37/E0 B7 E0 AA
E0 37/E0 B7 [1] [2]
54/84 [3]
Scroll Lock 46/C6
Home
Page Up
E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5/na
E0 46 E0 C6/na [3]
29/A9
02/82
03/83
04/84
05/85
06/86
07/87
08/88
09/89
0A/8A
0B/8B
0C/8C
0D/8D
2B/AB
E0 2A E0 7C/E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
E0 7C/E0 F0 7C [1] [2]
84/F0 84 [3]
7E/F0 7E
E1 14 77 E1 F0 14 F0 77/na
E0 7E E0 F0 7E/na [3]
0E/F0 E0
16/F0 16
1E/F0 1E
26/F0 26
25/F0 25
2E/F0 2E
36/F0 36
3D/F0 3D
3E/F0 3E
46/F0 46
45/F0 45
4E/F0 4E
55/F0 55
5D/F0 5D
Backspace 0E/8E
Insert E0 52/E0 D2
E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 52/E0 D2 E0 AA [6]
66/F0 66
E0 70/E0 F0 70
E0 F0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12 [6]
57/na
5F/na
62/na
0E/F0 0E
46/F0 46
1E/F0 1E
26/F0 26
25/F0 25
2E/F0 2E
36/F0 36
3D/F0 3D
3E/F0 3E
46/F0 46
45/F0 45
4E/F0 4E
55/F0 55
5C/F0 5C
66/F0 66
67/na
E0 47/E0 D2
E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 47/E0 C7 E0 AA [6]
E0 6C/E0 F0 6C
E0 F0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12 [6]
6E/na
E0 49/E0 C7
E0 AA E0 49/E0 C9 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 49/E0 C9 E0 AA [6]
E0 7D/E0 F0 7D
E0 F0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12 [6]
6F/na
C-12 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
Table C-2. (Continued)
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
55
56
57
48
49
50
51
52
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
37
38
39
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1
35
36
53
54
Mode 2 Mode 3
O
P
I
U
T
Y
E
R
-
Tab
Q
W
Num Lock 45/C5
/ E0 35/E0 B5
E0 AA E0 35/E0 B5 E0 2A [1]
77/F0 77 76/na
E0 4A/E0 F0 4A
E0 F0 12 E0 4A/E0 F0 4A E0 12 [1]
77/na
* 37/B7 7C/F0 7C 7E/na
4A/CA
0F/8F
10/90
11/91
7B/F0 7B
0D/F0 0D
15/F0 15
1D/F0 1D
84/na
0D/na
15/na
1D/F0 1D
12/92
13/93
14/94
15/95
16/96
17/97
18/98
19/99
24/F0 24
2D/F0 2D
2C/F0 2C
35/F0 35
3C/F0 3C
43/F0 43
44/F0 44
4D/F0 4D
24/F0 24
2D/F0 2D
2C/F0 2C
35/F0 35
3C/F0 3C
43/F0 43
44/F0 44
4D/F0 4D
]
[
Delete
End
1A/9A
1B/9B
54/F0 54
5B/F0 5B
54/F0 54
5B/F0 5B
E0 53/E0 D3
E0 AA E0 53/E0 D3 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 53/E0 D3 E0 AA [6]
E0 71/E0 F0 71
E0 F0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12 [6]
64/F0 64
65/F0 65 E0 4F/E0 CF
E0 AA E0 4F/E0 CF E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4F/E0 CF E0 AA [6]
E0 69/E0 F0 69
E0 F0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12 [6]
8
9
Page Down E0 51/E0 D1
E0 AA E0 51/E0 D1 E0 2A [4]
E0 @a E0 51/E0 D1 E0 AA [6]
E0 7A/E0 F0 7A
E0 F0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12 [6]
6D/F0 6D
7 47/C7 [6] 6C/F0 6C [6] 6C/na [6]
48/C8 [6]
49/C9 [6]
75/F0 75 [6]
7D/F0 7D [6]
75/na [6]
7D/na [6]
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-13
Keyboard
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1
78
79
80
81
74
75
76
77
82
83
84
70
71
72
73
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
58
59
60
61
.
,
M
B
N
C
V
Z
X
6
Shift (left)
4
5
‘
Enter
;
L
J
K
G
H
D
F
A
S
+ 4E/CE [6]
Caps Lock 3A/BA
1E/9E
1F/9F
20/A0
21/A1
22/A2
23/A3
24/A4
25/A5
26/A6
27/A7
28/A8
1C/9C
4B/CB [6]
4C/CC [6]
4D/CD [6]
2A/AA
2C/AC
2D/AD
2E/AE
2F/AF
30/B0
31/B1
32/B2
33/B3
34/B4
Table C-2. (Continued)
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
Mode 2
74/F0 74 [6]
12/F0 12
1A/F0 1A
22/F0 22
21/F0 21
2A/F0 2A
32/F0 32
31/F0 31
3A/F0 3A
41/F0 41
49/F0 49
79/F0 79 [6]
58/F0 58
1C/F0 1C
1B/F0 1B
23/F0 23
2B/F0 2B
34/F0 34
33/F0 33
3B/F0 3B
42/F0 42
4B/F0 4B
4C/F0 4C
52/F0 52
5A/F0 5A
6B/F0 6B [6]
73/F0 73 [6]
C-14 361834-002
Mode 3
74/na [6]
12/F0 12
1A/F0 1A
22/F0 22
21/F0 21
2A/F0 2A
32/F0 32
31/F0 31
3A/F0 3A
41/F0 41
49/F0 49
3B/F0 3B
42/F0 42
4B/F0 4B
4C/F0 4C
52/F0 52
5A/F0 5A
6B/na [6]
73/na [6]
7C/F0 7C
14/F0 14
1C/F0 1C
1B/F0 1B
23/F0 23
2B/F0 2B
34/F0 34
33/F0 33
Technical Reference Guide
Table C-2. (Continued)
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100 0
101 .
102 na
103 na
104 na
1
2
3
Enter
/ 35/B5
Shift (right) 36/B6
4A/F0 4A
59/F0 59
E0 48/E0 C8
E0 AA E0 48/E0 C8 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 48/E0 C8 E0 AA [6]
E0 75/E0 F0 75
E0 F0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12 [6]
4F/CF [6] 69/F0 69 [6]
50/D0 [6]
51/D1 [6]
E0 1C/E0 9C
72/F0 72 [6]
7A/F0 7A [6]
E0 5A/F0 E0 5A
4A/F0 4A
59/F0 59
63/F0 63
Ctrl (left)
Alt (left)
(Space)
Alt (right)
1D/9D
38/B8
39/B9
E0 38/E0 B8
14/F0 14
11/F0 11
29/F0 29
E0 11/F0 E0 11
69/na [6]
72/na [6]
7A/na [6]
79/F0
79[6]
11/F0 11
19/F0 19
29/F0 29
39/na
58/na
61/F0 61
Ctrl (right) E0 1D/E0 9D E0 14/F0 E0 14
E0 4B/E0 CB
E0 AA E0 4B/E0 CB E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4B/E0 CB E0 AA [6]
E0 6B/Eo F0 6B
E0 F0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12[6]
E0 50/E0 D0
E0 AA E0 50/E0 D0 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 50/E0 D0 E0 AA [6]
E0 72/E0 F0 72
E0 F0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12[6]
E0 4D/E0 CD
E0 AA E0 4D/E0 CD E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4D/E0 CD E0 AA [6]
E0 74/E0 F0 74
E0 F0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12[6]
60/F0 60
6A/F0 6A
52/D2 [6]
53/D3 [6]
7E/FE
2B/AB
36/D6
70/F0 70 [6]
71/F0 71 [6]
6D/F0 6D
5D/F0 5D
61/F0 61
70/na [6]
71/na [6]
7B/F0 7B
53/F0 53
13/F0 13
Keyboard
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-15
Keyboard
Table C-2. (Continued)
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make/Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos.
Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
Btn 6 [8]
Btn 7 [8]
Btn 1 [9]
Btn 2 [9]
Btn 3 [9]
Btn 4 [9]
Btn 5 [9]
Btn 6 [9]
Btn 7 [9]
Btn 8 [9]
110 (Win95) [7] E0 5B/E0 DB
E0 AA E0 5B/E0 DB E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5B/E0 DB E0 AA [6]
E0 1F/E0 F0 1F
E0 F0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12 [6]
111 (Win95) [7] E0 5C/E0 DC
E0 AA E0 5C/E0 DC E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5C/E0 DC E0 AA [6]
E0 2F/E0 F0 27
E0 F0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 F0 12 [6]
8B/F0 8B
8C/F0 8C
8D/F0 8D 112 (Win Apps)
[7]
E0 5D/E0 DD
E0 AA E0 5D/E0 DD E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA [6]
E0 2F/E0 F0 2F
E0 F0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12 [6
Btn 1 [8] E0 1E/E0 9E E0 1C/E0 F0 1C
Btn 2 [8]
Btn 3 [8]
Btn 4 [8]
Btn 5 [8]
E0 26/E0 A6
E0 25/E0 A5
E0 23/E0 A3
E0 21/E0 A1
E0 4B/E0 F0 4B
E0 42/E0 F0 42
E0 33/E0 F0 33
E0 2B/E0 F0 2B
95/F0 95
9C/F0 9C
9D/F0 9D
9A/F0 9A
99/F0 99
96/F0 96
97/F0 97
E0 12/E0 92
E0 32/E0 B2
E0 23/E0 A3
E0 1F/E0 9F
E0 1A/E0 9A
E0 1E/E0 9E
E0 13/E0 93
E0 14/E0 94
E0 24/E0 F0 24
E0 3A/E0 F0 3A
E0 33/E0 F0 33
E0 1B/E0 F0 1B
E0 54/E0 F0 54
E0 1C/E0 F0 1C
E0 2D/E0 F0 2D
E0 2C/E0 F0 2C
9A/F0 9A
80/F0 80
99/F0 99
95/F0 95
0C/F0 0C
9D/F0 9D
E0 15/E0 95
E0 1B/E0 9B
E0 35/E0 F0 35
E0 5B/E0 F0 5B
96/F0 96
97/F0 97
All codes assume Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys inactive unless otherwise noted.
NA = Not applicable
[1] Shift (left) key active.
[2] Ctrl key active.
[3] Alt key active.
[4] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute AA/2A make/break codes for B6/36 codes.
[5] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute F0 12/12 make/break codes for F0 59/59 codes.
[6] Num Lock key active.
[7] Windows keyboards only.
[8] 7-Button Easy Access keyboard.
[9] 8-Button Easy Access keyboard.
C-16 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Keyboard
C.3 Connectors
Two types of keyboard interfaces may be used in HP/Compaq systems: PS/2-type and USB-type.
System units that provide a PS/2 connector will ship with a PS/2-type keyboard but may also support simultaneous connection of a USB keyboard. Systems that do not provide a PS/2 interface will ship with a USB keyboard. For a detailed description of the PS/2 and USB interfaces refer to Chapter 5 “Input/Output” of this guide. The keyboard cable connectors and their pinouts are described in the following figures:
3
5
1 2
6
4
4
5
6
2
3
Pin
1
Function
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 VDC
Clock
Not connected
Figure C-9. PS/2 Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)
4 3 2 1
2
3
Pin
1
4
Function
+5 VDC
Data (-)
Data (+)
Ground
Figure C-10. USB Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)
Technical Reference Guide 361834-002 C-17
Keyboard
C-18 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
Index
Numerics
8259 Mode 4-12
A
AC97 Audio Controller 5-31
Advanced Digital Display (ADD2) 6-22 advanced, Computer Setup heading 7-13
APIC Mode 4-13 audible (beep) indications 4-24 audio codec 32
Audio Specifications 5-35
B
beep indications 4-24
BIOS upgrading 8-2 boot device order 8-3
Boot Error Codes 8-5
C
cable lock 4-22
CMOS 4-19
CMOS, clearing 4-9
Computer Setup 8-4 configuration memory 4-19
D
Direct Memory Access (DMA) 4-16
Diskette Drive Connector 4-11 diskette drive interface 4-7
F
file, Computer Setup heading 8-6
G
graphics subsystem 6-1
H
header pinouts 7-16
Technical Reference Guide
I
I/O map 4-26
IDE (PATA) Connector 4-3 integrated graphics controller (IGC). 6-2 interrupts, hardware 4-11 interrupts, PCI 4-13
K
keyboard interface 5-24
L
LED indications 4-24, 8-5
M
Memory 3-4 memory allocation 3-4 memory map 3-7 model numbering 1-2 mouse interface 5-24
N
Network Boot 8-4
Network Interface Controller 5-36
P
parallel interface 5-14
Parallel Interface Connector 5-17 password, Setup 4-22
PATA 4-1
PCI 2.3 4-2
PCI Express 4-6
Pentium 4 processor 3-2 power states 7-7
Processor Upgrading 3-3
R
Real-time clock (RTC) 4-19
ROM flashing 8-2
361834-002 Index–1
Index
S
SATA 4-1
SATA Connector 4-6
SDVO 6-2 security
Computer Setup heading 9 serial interface 5-12
Serial Interface Connector 5-12 serial number 1-3
Smart Cover Lock 2-23
Smart Cover Sensor 2-22
SMBIOS 8-19
SPD address map 3-6 specifications physical 2-32 storage, Computer Setup heading 7 system ID 8-17
T
Temperature Status 8-17
U
Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface 5-25 upgrading BIOS 8-2 upgrading graphics 6-5
USB 5-25
V
VGA connector 6-6
W
Web sites
Adobe Systems, Inc. 1-1
HP 1-1
Intel Corporation 1-1
Standard Microsystems Corporation 1-1
USB user group 1-1
Index–2 361834-002 Technical Reference Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project